JP7241725B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine and a reel game machine. The present invention relates to a technical field related to gaming machines that can be set based on the above.

Various types of gaming machines are widely known, for example, pinball gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, and reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines.
As a game machine, for example, there is a slot machine, in which a set value indicating a stage of winning probability for winning a game state advantageous to a player can be set based on an operation.

In addition, the following patent document 1 can be mentioned about related prior art.

Japanese Patent No. 5956529

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to reduce the storage capacity of storage means for storing various types of control information related to set values in a gaming machine in which set values can be set.

A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises random number lottery means capable of executing a random number lottery in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition, special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, and winning in the random number lottery. display means capable of displaying setting information related to the probability that the setting information will confirmation enabling means for starting a setting confirmation period, which is a period during which confirmation of the setting information is possible, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition ; and when the setting information is abnormal, , a stop means for making a game unavailable state, and a display setting processing means for executing a setting process for performing an operation confirmation display of the display means after the settable period or the setting confirmation period ends, A common security signal is output during the settable period and the setting confirmation period, and display of the setting information during the settable period and display of the setting information during the setting confirmation period are performed using common display control processing. The game is intermittently displayed at a predetermined cycle, and specific information different from the set information is displayed on the display means during the game disabled state.

As a result, the display control processing used for displaying the setting information is shared between the settable period and the setting confirmation period, and the program for display is shared.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the storage means .

1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming machine as an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the game board of the game machine as an embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine as an embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a pre-reading forewarning effect in the embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side of the embodiment; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an initial setting process in FIG. 5; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing power supply abnormality check processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between each determination condition in terms of operation and the value of the W register when transitioning to setting change processing, RAM clear processing, setting confirmation processing, and backup restoration processing; 6 is a flowchart showing main loop processing in FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting change process in FIG. 5; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing output management processing in FIG. 10; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment decoding table; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the segment configuration and the display pattern of the segments in the setting value indicator; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing in FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process in FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a set value offset conversion table; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing main loop pre-processing in FIG. 5 ; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the main control side timer interrupt processing of embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing power supply check/backup processing in FIG. 18; FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a setting abnormality check process in FIG. 18; FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing in FIG. 18; 21. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 21; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a change management process in FIG. 23; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot random number determination processing in FIG. It is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the random-number determination table for big-hit determination used for a big-hit random-number determination process. 25 is a flow chart showing variation pattern lottery processing in FIG. 24; It is the figure which showed the example of the deviation fluctuation pattern table of embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a hit variation pattern table of the embodiment. It is a diagram showing another example of the winning variation pattern table of the embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the common variation pattern table at the time of a setting error of embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a common variation pattern table for setting errors according to the embodiment; It is the figure which showed the storage example of the 1st data table and 2nd data table in embodiment. It is the figure which showed the other storage example of the 1st data table in embodiment, and a 2nd data table. It is the figure which illustrated the memory area structure in ROM of the main-control part. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams of scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, and motor data registration information according to the embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of sound data registration information according to the embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a main scenario table of the embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a sub-scenario table of the embodiment; It is a flow chart of production control main processing of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of command analysis processing in production control of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of the command correspondence processing in the production control of the embodiment. It is a flow chart of production control timer interrupt processing of the embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of display control timing of the embodiment; It is the figure which illustrated one display mode of the setting operation log|history. It is the figure which showed the example of the screen during a setting confirmation. It is the figure which showed the example of the information for a history display in embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information as an embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of processing for adding individual history information in history display information; 7 is a flowchart of power-on history information initial setting processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for updating history information in response to the occurrence of a target event for history display; FIG. 8 is a flowchart of history information update processing according to the embodiment; 9 is a flowchart of history display processing according to the embodiment; 9 is a flowchart of history information screen creation processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram exemplifying numerical values of set values that can be expressed in the embodiment; It is a flow chart of left design lottery processing of an embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the left design lottery table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for left design lottery. It is the flowchart which showed another example of left design lottery processing. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a left symbol lottery offset table used in the process shown in FIG. 60; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of mini-character advance notice lottery processing according to the embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a first mini-character advance notice lottery table; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a first advance notice offset table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second mini-character advance notice lottery table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second advance notice offset table; It is a flowchart of big hit production lottery processing of the embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68; FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a second offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68; FIG. It is a flow chart of SU notice lottery processing of an embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the SU effect table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU stage lottery. It is the figure which showed the example of the SU3 replacement table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU3 replacement. It is the flowchart which showed another example of the SU preliminary announcement lottery process. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a first offset table for SU3 replacement and a second offset table for SU3 replacement used in the process of FIG. 76; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a lottery mode of SU advance notice effect in the embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a first modified example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a second modified example; FIG. It is the figure which showed the example of the setting value conversion table which the production|presentation control part uses in a modification.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<1. Game Machine Structure>
<2. Game Machine Control Configuration>
[2-1. Main control part]
(Regarding setting value change operation)
(About performance display)
(Production control command)
[2-2. Production control unit]
<3. Overview of operation>
[3-1. Symbol variation display game]
(Special symbol variation display game)
(Decorative pattern variation display game)
(Normal pattern fluctuation display game)
(About hold)
[3-2. game state]
[3-3. About hit]
[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)
(Notice production)
(Direction means)
<4. Processing of Main Control Unit>
[4-1. Main control side main processing]
(initial setting processing)
(Processing after initial setting)
(main loop processing)
(setting change processing)
(RAM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(main loop preprocessing)
(Advantages of set value display data table and set value conversion table as embodiments)
[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
(power supply check/backup processing)
(Processing for error management and game progress, etc.)
[4-3. Processing related to special symbol variation display game]
(Special design management processing)
(Special figure 1 starting entrance check process)
(Special symbol variation start process)
(variation management processing)
(Jackpot random number determination process)
(Variation pattern lottery process)
(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)
<5. Processing of Production Control Unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]
[5-2. Display setting history confirmation screen]
[5-3. Regarding the data type of the setting value in the embodiment]
[5-4. Setting Suggestion Effect]
(Suggestive production by left pattern)
(Suggestion production by mini character notice)
(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)
(Suggestion production by SU notice)
[5-5. Regarding the difference in the range of setting values that the main control unit and the production control unit correspond]
<6. Variation>
<7. Summary of Embodiments>
<8. Other variations

<1. Game Machine Structure>

The structure of a pachinko game machine 1 as an embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board 3 of the pachinko game machine 1.

A pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "game machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in an attached game board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. have. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Also, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is released. , to release the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 and open to the front side.

Under the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 is pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

The upper receiving tray unit 8 also has a ball ejection button 14 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and a game ball dispensing device (not shown) for dispensing game balls. A ball lending button 11 for making a request and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided. Also, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a performance button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. The effect button 13 can be operated (input can be accepted) when the built-in lamp (button LED 75) is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and a predetermined operation (press, repeated hits, long press, etc.) is performed while the built-in lamp is lit. By doing so, it is possible to bring about changes in the production.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the front operation panel 7 is provided with a cross key 16 for users such as players and hall staff to select various items and indicate directions. there is

A firing operation handle 15 for operating a firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7 .

Speakers 46 are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the shooting operation handle 15 to produce a sound effect (sound effect). In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, full-color LEDs for light production, etc.) are provided at appropriate locations on the glass door 6 to exhibit a light production effect by light decoration. A plurality of full-color LEDs (light effect LEDs) as the decorative lamps 45 are provided around the pachinko game machine, that is, around the front frame edge of the glass door 6 in the circumferential direction.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in the figure is provided with a ball guiding rail 5 that guides the shot game balls in an annular shape as a board surface partitioning member. The four corners are non-game areas.

Approximately in the center of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) are displayed independently. A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 capable of variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a left pattern (corresponding to the left display area), a middle pattern (corresponding to the middle display area), and a right pattern (corresponding to the right display area) is provided. is provided. The liquid crystal display device 36, under the control of the effect control section 24, which will be described later, displays various effects in the form of images in addition to the variable display operation of decorative symbols.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and to control the flow of the game ball according to the launch strength or stroke length of the game ball. It works as flow path distribution means that enables distribution of the path to the left and right. In this embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 3a so that the flow paths for game balls are formed on both upper sides (left and right sides) of the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. A game ball hit by the shooting device 32 on the upper side of the game area 3a is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and is divided into the left flowing path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and the right flowing path 3c on the right side. flow something.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as various function display portions, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is an upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and a lower starting port. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) arranged side by side corresponding to the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. In the liquid crystal display device 36, in time synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns by the special pattern display devices 38a and 38b, the decorative patterns by images are variably displayed, and decorated with various advance notice effects (effect images). A symbol variation display game is executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

In addition, in the various function display units, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display device) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged. Composite is called 5 special patterns 1, 2, display of the number of operation pending balls of normal patterns, state notification during variable time reduction function (during time saving) and during high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having a display function.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol variation display game is executed by a normal symbol variation display operation represented by two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, normal patterns by LEDs alternately turn on and off in a seesaw manner, and by stopping with either side lit up, the propriety of the normal pattern variable display game becomes clear. there is Further, a round number display device 39b having three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided. The number-of-rounds display device 39b notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit by a combination of lighting and extinguishing states of the three LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. Detecting sensors 34a, 35a (upper start sensor 34a, lower start sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of game balls are formed inside each of them. ing.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases "special symbol 1" (abbreviated as )), and is configured as a fixed winning rate type winning device that does not have starting opening/closing means (means for opening or enlarging the starting opening). In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (eg, game nail (not shown), windmill 44, center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path 3b to the upper start port 34 A game ball that has flowed down the path 3c is configured to easily enter (win a prize), whereas a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a variable winning rate type winning device capable of varying the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening by the opening opening/closing means. In this embodiment, as a starting opening opening and closing means, a so-called "electric tulip It is configured as a "type" winning device.

The lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2", and in some cases is abbreviated as "special symbol 2". ), and the winning region of the lower starting port 35 is an open state ( winning easy state) and a closed state (difficult winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than in the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (non-winning state) is maintained in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

On both sides of the normal variable prize winning device 41, a total of four general prize winning openings 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, are arranged. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In addition, a movable accessory (not shown) that exerts a visual performance effect is arranged in the area of the game board at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball.

In addition, diagonally above the normal variable winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the middle part of the right flow path 3c, there is a normal symbol start port 37 (third start means) are provided. This normal symbol starting port 37 is a prize winning port related to normal symbol fluctuation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided. is formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b or may be formed in both flow paths.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, there is a special variable winning configured to be able to open or expand the big winning port 50 by a projecting open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 50 is formed inside.

A bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging out from the surface of the game board 3 is formed around the big winning opening 50, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right downstream path 3c. there is When the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large winning opening closed state), the downstream guide portion ( It is adapted to form part of the upper edge 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, a flow path correction plate is provided substantially parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is protruded, and functions to attract the falling game balls toward the big winning hole 50.例文帳に追加

The process of entering the game ball into the big winning hole 50 is as follows.
A game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is projected onto the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball contacts the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the game board 3 surface, thereby correcting the flowing direction of the game ball to the direction of the big winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (closed state of the large winning opening), the game ball rolls on it, and further in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is guided in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can enter the lower starting port 35 . On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted in the game board surface and the big winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is led into the big winning opening 50.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the firing position on the side of the special variable winning device 52 (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c), the upper start opening A game ball is difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, winning to the starting openings 34 and 35 is difficult or impossible. The movable wing pieces 47 operate in a more advantageous opening/closing pattern than in the normal state in a game state accompanied by a state with an electric sapo, which will be described later.

In the case of the present embodiment, the manner in which the player should hit to obtain an advantageous situation changes according to the game state. Specifically, if the game state is accompanied by the "state without electric sapo", which will be described later, it is advantageous to hit "left", aiming for the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b. If it is a game state accompanied by "with state", "right hitting" aiming to make the game ball pass through the right flow path 3c is advantageous.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, a promise is made for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting port 34 or lower starting port 35, 13 for the big winning port 50, and 10 for the general winning port 43) is determined by the game ball payout device 19 (Fig. 3 See). The game balls that have not won the winning openings are ejected from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. FIG.
Here, "winning" means that the winning opening does not have a structure in which the game ball is taken in, or the winning opening is not a structure in which the game ball is taken in, but is a winning opening made up of a pass-through gate (for example, the normal symbol start opening 37). If it is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, "winning" occurs in that winning hole treated as if A game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning hole, it will be detected by the winning detection switch. Irrespective of this, there are cases where the term "winning" includes the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Game Machine Control Configuration>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing game operation control of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that controls overall game operations (game operation control), and a main control unit. A production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "production control unit 24") that receives production control commands from the production means and controls the execution of production (appearance control) by the production means, and a prize ball. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 for performing payout control, a power supply board (power control means (not shown)) for generating and supplying necessary power to the gaming machine 1 from an external power supply (not shown), is configured with
The effect control unit 24 is connected to a liquid crystal control unit 40 that drives the display of a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device. The liquid crystal control unit 40 is, for example, the above-described main control board (main control unit) 20, production control board (production control unit) 24, payout control board 29, various boards such as a power supply board, etc. Micro It is configured with a computer.
Note that the power supply route to each part is omitted in FIG.

[2-1. Main control part]

The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor containing a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing game operation control procedures, various data necessary for game operation control are stored. A ROM (Read Only Memory) 202 (main control ROM) for storing data and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and buffer memory are installed, and the microcomputer is configured as a whole. .

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing periodic interrupts, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) with a constant period, a time measurement function, and the CPU 201. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts that give interrupt signals, and can output a system reset signal to reset the CPU 201 by detecting power on/off and power failure. A reset circuit, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation of the control program, and an out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range , and a counter circuit or the like for generating random numbers within a certain range in terms of hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generating circuit for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit for sampling random numbers from the random number generating circuit at predetermined timings, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 obtains the numerical value indicated by the random number generating circuit as a random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit (magnitude of random number: 65536)). , the random number is used for the jackpot lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent fraudulent actions such as hitting for a win.

The main control unit 20 includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winning (entering a ball) to the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winning to the lower starting hole 35, and a normal symbol starting hole 37. A normal symbol start opening sensor 37a that detects the passage of the, a large winning opening sensor 52a that detects winning to the big winning opening 50, a general winning opening sensor 43a that detects winning to the general winning opening 43, and an out opening 49 An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (out ball) discharged from the outlet is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals output from these. The main control unit 20 can grasp which winning hole the game ball has entered based on the detection signal from each sensor.

The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting opening 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected with a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. . Furthermore, the main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling display of normal symbols.

A compound display device 38c and a round number display device 39b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 outputs control signals for controlling display of various information displayed on the compound display device 38c, It is possible to transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the prescribed number of rounds by the big hit displayed on the number display device 39b.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external centralized terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 transmits predetermined signals to the hall computer HC provided outside the game machine via the frame external centralized terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, big hit information, prize ball information, symbol variation execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring game information from the main control unit 20 and managing the operation status of the pachinko hall gaming machines in an integrated manner.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) relating to payout is sent to the payout control board 29 A payout control command that specifies ) can be transmitted.

The payout control board 29 is connected with a launch control board (launch control section) 28 that controls the launcher 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of this payout control board 29 are to receive payout control commands from the main control unit 20, to control prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and to transmit status signals to the main control unit 20. is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a shortage of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls (prize balls) to be paid out. can receive each detection signal. The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for putting out game balls. of control signals can be transmitted.

Further, the payout control board 29 is provided with a full detection sensor 60 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9) that detects when the upper tray 9 is full of game balls. , a front door open sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects at least the open state of the front frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the front door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This state signal includes a ball clogged signal indicating a full state, a door open signal indicating that at least the front frame 2 is open, a resupply out signal indicating insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and prize balls. A count error signal indicating an insufficient payout of balls or an abnormality in the ball counting sensor 19b, and a payout completion signal indicating completion of the payout operation are included, and various status signals can be transmitted. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 is open (door open error), whether the game ball dispensing device 19 is normally dispensed (out-of-supply error), and whether the upper tray 9 Monitor the full state (ball clogging error), etc.

Furthermore, a firing control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a permission signal for permitting firing can be transmitted to the firing control board 28. FIG. The firing control board 28 controls energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the dispensing control board 29, and operates the firing operation handle 15. It realizes the shooting operation of the game ball by. Specifically, when a firing permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (firing permission signal ON state), a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 allows the player to touch the handle. The shooting operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the presence of the game ball is detected and the shooting stop switch (not shown) provided on the shooting operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the shooting permission signal is not output (shooting permission signal OFF state), even if the shooting operation handle 15 is operated, the shooting operation is not executed and the game ball is not shot. In addition, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁
When the payout control board 29 detects the ball jam error, it transmits a ball jam signal to the main control unit 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (fire permission signal OFF). Until the full state of is eliminated, the control is performed to stop the launching operation.
Also, the payout control board 29 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 28 on condition that the main control unit 20 instructs launch permission.

Here, the main control unit 20 is connected to a setting key switch 94 and a RAM clear switch 98, and can receive detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for inputting an instruction to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 203 .
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to a setting change mode (at the time of ON operation) by inserting a setting key possessed by the hall staff and performing an ON/OFF operation when power is turned on.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the set value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value representing the stage of the winning probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON/OFF according to the operation of a RAM clear button which is operable with the front frame 2 opened. The setting key switch 98 is provided with a key cylinder into which the above-described setting key can be inserted and removed. When it is turned in the opposite direction from the ON state, it is turned OFF. The key cylinder is provided so that it can be operated by inserting a setting key while the front frame 2 is open. Note that the key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting a setting key.

In this example, the above RAM clear button is also used for changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for forwarding the set value Ve.

A RAM clear switch 98 and a setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine 1 . For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20 .

A setting/performance indicator 97 is also connected to the main controller 20 .
The setting/performance display 97 is configured with, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as display means capable of displaying setting values Ve and performance information (to be described later). The setting/performance indicator 97 is mounted, for example, on the main control unit (main control board) 20 at a position where it can be easily viewed.
The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying the setting value Ve and performance information to the setting/performance display device 97 .

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least the jackpot (hit type that the condition device described later will operate) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) The higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability (setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and thereafter, the winning probability increases in ascending order of the set values), which works favorably for the player. there is In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called "machine discount (ball output rate, payout rate)", which is advantageous to the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the probability of winning a jackpot, a machine discount, etc., and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a profit state acting on a player. , in the present embodiment, the degree of advantage in the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are six levels of set value Ve (levels of advantage) that are legally available. Specifically, it is assumed that the legally usable range of the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as “usable range Re”) is in the range of “1” to “6”.
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only a part of the set values Ve among the set values Ve that can be used under the rule. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 of this example uses only three values, for example, "1", "2", and "6", among the set values Ve within the usable range Re, which are "1" to "6". do. In other words, the specification is limited to three stages for the winning probability, instead of six stages, which is the maximum stage according to the rules.
Hereinafter, the range of setting values Ve actually used in the pachinko game machine 1, specifically, the range of setting values Ve actually used among the setting values Ve within the usable range Re (in the above example, "1 ", "2", and "6") is referred to as "usage range Ru".

The set value Ve is set exclusively by a hall staff such as a hall clerk based on the sales strategy of the hall (amusement store). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, it is possible to appropriately determine which jackpot winning probability is changed according to the set value Ve, or the type of target jackpot. For example, if there are three types of jackpots 1 to 3, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the winning probability of all the jackpots 1 to 3 may be. The combined winning probability may be increased. Also, the winning probability of some jackpots may be increased. For example, only the winning probabilities of the jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the winning probability of the jackpot 3 may be set to be constant with all set values Ve.

(Regarding setting value change operation)

In order to change the setting value Ve, in this example, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON (operated to the setting change mode side) in a state where the gaming machine 1 is powered off and the front frame 2 is released, and The game machine 1 is powered on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance indicator 97, and the setting value Ve (1, 2, and 6 in this example) can be changed.

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is made in the main control side main process, which will be described later (see step S104 in FIG. 5). When the above operation conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, processing for setting change is executed accordingly.

After shifting to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button functioning as a change operator for the set value Ve is turned ON, the current display value of the setting/performance display 97 changes to "1→2→6→1→ 2→6→ . . . ” within the usage range Ru. When the setting key switch 94 is turned off when the desired set value Ve is reached, the set value Ve is determined, and information about the determined set value Ve is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 .
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated and the display of the setting/performance display 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the game is shifted to a state in which the progress of the game is permitted.

(About performance display)

The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information to the setting/performance display device 97 .
The performance information is information that pachinko halls and related government agencies want to confirm, and typical examples thereof include information on the presence or absence of fraudulent prize balls such as excess prize balls for the gaming machine 1 and information on the original performance of the gaming machine 1. is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player is enjoying the game, unlike the advance notice effect or the like.

For this reason, the setting/performance display device 97 is inside the game machine 1, for example, the main control unit (main control board) 20, the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28, the relay board, the production control unit (production control board (liquid crystal It is provided at a position where the display information can be viewed when the front frame 2 is opened, such as on the control board) ) 24 or a board case (a protective cover that protects the board).

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payout balls paid out due to winning during a specific state (total number of prize balls during a specific state: α) is The information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) divided by the number of pieces: β can be adopted as the performance information.
The above-mentioned "total number of payouts" is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out when entering the winning opening (upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, big winning opening 50). is. In the case of the present embodiment, there are three upper starting openings 34 or lower starting openings 35, thirteen large winning openings 50, and ten general winning openings 43. FIG.
Further, which state to adopt as the specific state can be appropriately determined according to the state under which performance information is desired to be grasped. In the case of this embodiment, any state can be employed among the normal state, latent probability state, time saving state, probability variable state, and jackpot game. Also, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, a normal state and a variable probability state, and all game states except during a winning game, etc., and the types to be measured can be determined as appropriate.
Also, as the period of the specific state, the period of either the low probability state or the high probability state of the jackpot lottery probability may be employed.
Also, the total number of payouts excluding one or a plurality of specific winning holes from the measurement target may be the total number of payouts (total number of payouts excluding specific winning holes). For example, the total number of payouts may be obtained by excluding the big winning opening 50 from the measurement target among the winning openings.

(2) In addition, only one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding a specific winning hole, or the total number of out-balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as the performance information.

In this embodiment, the total number of balls paid out during the normal state (normal number of balls paid out) and the total number of out balls during the normal state (normal number of out balls) are measured in real time. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 100 (normal payout count/normal out count x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as “normal ratio information”). In addition, the display value at this time shall be the value rounded off to the first decimal place.
Therefore, the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the normal ratio information are respectively stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM 203 (specified total winning ball number storage area, specified out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area). It is designed to be stored (memorized). However, when the total number of out-balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is stopped once, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the performance information. This prescribed number is not the total number of out balls in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during all game states (including during winning games) (hereinafter referred to as "the number of out balls in all states"). This all-state-out number is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (all-state-out number storage area) of the RAM 203 . Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the specified total number of winning balls storage area, specified out number storage area, specified ratio information storage area, and all state out number storage area are abbreviated as "measurement information storage area".

Then, the normal ratio information at the end point is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (this normal ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal payout number, normal out number and the total number of out balls) are cleared, and measurement is started again (measurement of the number of normal payouts, the normal number of out balls, the normal ratio information, and the number of out balls in all states is started). The setting/performance display device 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. It should be noted that not only the information of the previous time but also the history of the time before last or the time before that (three times before) may be displayed.

Here, in the case of this example, the setting/performance indicator 97 alternatively displays the setting value Ve and the performance information. Specifically, in this example, settings are changed and checked only when the power is turned on. After the set value Ve is displayed on the performance indicator 97 and the setting change or setting confirmation is completed, the performance information is displayed.
It should be noted that the configuration in which the set value Ve and the performance information are displayed by a common display is not limited, and a configuration in which they are displayed by separate displays can also be adopted. In that case, the setting value Ve and the performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Production control command)

The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information about the special symbol variation display game, information about errors, etc. to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent dishonesty such as goto, the main control unit 20 only transmits signals to the effect control unit 24, and a one-way communication configuration in which signals from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It's becoming

Here, the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT). Bit7 is ON, and Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When transmitting these information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, the CPU 201 (main control CPU), when there is a command to be transmitted, sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting, the first time strobe signal. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has passed since the transmission of this strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has passed since this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive commands.

[2-2. Production control unit]

The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor that incorporates a CPU 241 (production control CPU), and includes a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 that functions as a work area and buffer memory. Production control RAM) and a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), and other sound control unit (sound source IC), RTC (Real Time Clock) function unit, counter circuit, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. and controls the entire production operation.
The effect control unit 24 of this example has a memory 244 as a memory from which information can be read and written, in addition to the RAM 243 described above. The memory 244 is composed of, for example, an SRAM, and the speed of reading information by the CPU 241 is slower than that of the RAM 243 . The RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power supply, and cannot retain stored information when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, whereas the memory 244 is connected to a backup power supply and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. stored information can be retained even if the
The usage of the memory 244 will be described later.

The main role of the production control unit 24 is to receive the production control command from the main control unit 20, select and decide the production based on the production control command, and control the liquid crystal control unit 40 to cause the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image. , sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs (the button LED 75 and other performance LEDs (not shown)), operation control of the movable body (accessory), and the like.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as a computer device including a CPU and various memory devices, and controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 . The liquid crystal control unit 40 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, and an image that stores image data (effect image data) for which the VDP performs image expansion processing. A ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, and a CPU ( LCD control CPU), ROM (liquid crystal control ROM) that stores programs describing the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control, RAM (liquid crystal control ROM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory control RAM).
The liquid crystal control CPU controls the operation of the VDP (the display driving operation of the liquid crystal display device 36) based on the instruction from the effect control unit 24, so that the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an image according to the instruction of the effect control unit 24. is done.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment shown in FIG. Such a configuration is commonly referred to as a "two CPU" configuration. On the other hand, the configuration in which the effect control unit 24 is equipped with a CPU that performs the same function as the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40, that is, the configuration in which the effect control unit 24 also functions as the liquid crystal control unit 40 is a “1 CPU” configuration. is called

The effect control unit 24 also controls a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs in order to produce various effects (light effect, sound effect, and movable object effect using movable accessories). , a sound control unit for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, a drive control unit (motor drive circuit: driver) for the movable body accessory motor 80c that operates the movable body (not shown), and the like.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the motion of the movable body role is connected to the production control unit 24, and the production control unit 24 detects the current operating position of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. While monitoring (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position), the operation mode is controlled. Also, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, the malfunction of the action of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, it is detected as an error.

The effect control unit 24 is connected to switches for the effect button 13 and the cross key 16, that is, operation detection switches for the effect button 13 and the cross key 16. Each detection signal can be received.

Based on the performance control command sent from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 selects (determines) a performance pattern by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance, and selects (determines) the required performance pattern. To display a desired performance by controlling various performance means at timing. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern fluctuation display operation, A "drawing scenario" in a broad sense is realized by the time-series development of advance notice effects, etc.

Here, for the effect control command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-described strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), and receives and analyzes it. Specifically, the CPU 241 executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the input of the strobe signal described above, and obtains the effect control command in the interrupt processing realized thereby, and analyzes the contents of the command. conduct.
At this time, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 performs an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) even during execution of the interrupt process. is interrupted to perform command reception interrupt processing, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, command reception interrupt processing is performed preferentially.

<3. Overview of operation>
[3-1. Symbol variation display game]

Next, the outline of the game operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration (FIG. 3) as described above will be described.
First, the symbol variation display game will be described.

(Special symbol variation display game)

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 A "jackpot lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game. Derivation display is performed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big-hit lottery based on winning the upper starting port 34 and the big-winning lottery based on winning the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the big-hit lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived from the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big-hit lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived from the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the side of the special symbol display device 38b, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variability display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the big win lottery result is a "big win", a predetermined "big win". In other cases, the special symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "lost" mode, thereby deriving the game result (big hit lottery result).

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the side of the special symbol display device 38b. The variable display game is called "special symbol variable display game 2". In addition, unless particularly necessary, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and ""Special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game".

(Decorative pattern variation display game)

In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (dramatic game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Along with this, various productions are developed. When the special pattern variation display game ends, the decoration pattern variation display game also ends, the special pattern display device reflects the predetermined special pattern indicating the big win lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the big win lottery result. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big win" (when the big win lottery result is "big win"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the display state of "7" in the 7 segment), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". ” in each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” display areas, the three decorative patterns are “7”, “7”, “7 ” is displayed).

When the "big hit" is achieved, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "big win" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern. A special game state (jackpot game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the open door 52b is operated until the opening time of the jackpot opens for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) or until the number of game balls that win the jackpot (big prize jack) 50) (maximum number of winning balls: maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or enlarged by one actuation of the accessory: e.g. 9) until the winning area is opened or expanded, and if any of these conditions are met, the big winning opening is closed. round) repeated.

When the big win game is started, an opening performance for notifying the start of the big win is first performed, and after the opening performance is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. After the end of the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is performed to notify that the big win is over, thereby ending the big win game.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20, based on the entry (winning) of the game ball into the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, specifically On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting opening sensor 34a or the lower starting opening sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition related to special symbols) is met, a lottery will be held to determine whether it is a "big hit" or "lose". If it is a ``jackpot'', the type of the jackpot will be drawn, and if it is a ``losing'', the drawing of the winning type (winning type (hit type) lottery) ) 'and (if there is only one type of loss, the lottery may be omitted because there is no need to perform a type lottery for the loss), and based on the lottery result information, the special symbol fluctuation pattern Also, a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special stop symbol") to be finally stopped and displayed is determined according to the winning type.
Then, the main control unit 20, as the production control command to specify the processing state, at least special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the big hit lottery result and special symbol variation time, etc.) "variation pattern specification command" including It is transmitted to the production control section 24 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control section 24 . In addition, in this embodiment, in order to increase the variety of effects, a "decorative design designation command" including special stop design information (symbol lottery result information (information on winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24. It's like

The above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information can include information designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "ready-to-win effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect", which will be described later) will occur. More specifically, the variation patterns of the special symbols are roughly classified into a "hit variation pattern" for winning and a "losing variation pattern" for losing, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. For these variation patterns, for example, 'reach variation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of reach production described later, 'normal variation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of reach production, pseudo-continuous production and reach production (overlapping occurrence) A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as 'pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern' to be specified, 'pseudo-continuous normal fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of pseudo-continuous production and does not specify the occurrence of reach production. In order to secure the performance time of the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation pattern that designates the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is usually set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

Effect control unit 24, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, variation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, chronologically during the decorative design variation display game Decide the production content to be developed (production scenario such as advance notice production) and the decorative pattern to be finally displayed stopped (decorative stop pattern), and display the decorative pattern by fluctuating according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern. A pattern variation display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. has substantially the same time width. The effect control unit 24 also controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect), sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting and flashing drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45 and LED are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decoration symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above-described two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise specified.

(Normal pattern fluctuation display game)

In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning a prize), the main control unit 20 performs an "auxiliary winning lottery" based on a random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variation display game, and after a certain period of time has passed, the result is changed to a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assist hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is set to a specific lighting state (for example, two LEDs 39 are all lit, or "○" and " The LED on the side of "○" among the LEDs expressing "x" is in a lighting state), and the display is stopped.

When this "assist hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates, whereby the movable wing 47 opens in an inverted "V" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Or it becomes a state (starting opening open state) that is enlarged and the game ball is easy to flow in, and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this normal electric open game, by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41, until the opening time of the lower starting port 35 passes a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or the game winning the lower starting port 35 The winning area is opened or expanded until the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4). 2 times) is repeated.

(About hold)

Here, in this embodiment, during the special/decorative pattern variation display game, during the normal pattern variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the general electric open game, the upper start port 34, the lower start port 35, or the normal symbol start port 37 When a prize is generated, that is, there is an input of a detection signal from the upper starting opening sensor 34a or the lower starting opening sensor 35a or the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is established, As data relating to the right to start the variable display game, this data is reserved and stored up to a predetermined maximum number of reserved memories (for example, a maximum of 4), excluding data related to the variable display. The reserved data that is not used for the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as "operational reserved ball". In order to make clear to the player the number of activated balls held, a special held display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place on the gaming machine 1, or a held display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. light up the device.

Also, in this embodiment, up to four operation reserve balls relating to special design 1, special design 2, and normal design are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of RAM 203, respectively, and reserved as the number of determinations of special design or normal design variation. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reservation memory number) of each operation reservation ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

[3-2. game state]

The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of game states in addition to the big win which is the special game state. In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, first, various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of game states: a normal state, a time-saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variable state. These game states are distinguished by whether or not a jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state) and an electric chew support state (privilege game) occur (with electric support, without electric support).

"Electric chew support state" means that the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 in the general electric open game (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing 47 and the number of times it is opened) is in the normal state It refers to the "open extended state" extended more than. When the open extension state occurs, the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds in the normal state (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is increased, for example. It is extended from the normal 1 time to 2 to 3 times.
In the case of the present embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the auxiliary winning lottery probability fluctuates from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (normal A pattern probability fluctuation state) occurs, and a 'normal pattern time saving state' that shortens the average time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation display operation time) occurs (for example, from 10 seconds 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the common electric open game occurs frequently, and the operating rate improved state (high base state) in which the operating rate of the movable wing pieces 47 per unit time is improved than in the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under the electric chewing support state is abbreviated as "with electric support", and the other case is abbreviated as "without electric support".

In the present embodiment, the “normal state” means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and the game state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

"Time-saving state" means that the probability of the jackpot lottery is as low as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (variation display operation time of special symbols)) is lower than the normal state. It is a game state in which a 'special symbol time saving state' that is also shortened occurs and an electric chew support state occurs. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + electric sapo + special symbol time saving state".

The “potential state” is a “special symbol probability variable state” in which the jackpot lottery probability has changed to a high probability (for example, 1/39.9) that is higher than the above low probability, and a game state without an electric sapo (high Probability + no electricity support).

"Probability variable state" is a game state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the latent probability state, but the special symbol time saving state and the electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the variable state, it becomes "high probability + electric sapo + special pattern time saving state".

Regarding the game state, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability, if the game state is "normal state" or "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability is "low probability state", and the game state is "latent state" or "variable probability". state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. During the jackpot, a jackpot game is generated in which the jackpot is opened and closed, but the jackpot lottery probability and the presence/absence of an electric sapo are placed under the same low probability/no electric sapo game state as in the above-described normal state.

[3-3. About hit]

Next, the “hit” in the game machine 1 will be explained.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big win lottery (hit lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of wins. In the case of this example, the types of hits include, for example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "variable probability 6R", and "variable probability 10R".
Note that the notation of "R" means the prescribed number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or a game ball is displayed. It means something that operates when passing through a specific area in the big winning opening.

The variable probability state ends the high probability state and shifts to the low probability state when the special symbol variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: specified ST number) without winning the jackpot type. , It is a so-called "number-cutting probability machine (ST machine)", and when the prescribed number of STs is completed, the state is shifted to the normal state from the next game. However, it may be a "general probability changer" that continues until the next big hit is won.
The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2), It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Also, the number of times of the time-saving state is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be determined as appropriate according to the playability. Also, there is no particular limitation on the type of hit to be provided, and it can be determined as appropriate.

Here, in this example, a plurality of types are provided for "losing" as well as the jackpot types. Specifically, there are three kinds of loss types: "loss 1", "loss 2", and "loss 3".
As described above, when the result of the win-lose lottery is "lost", the lottery for the type of winning is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3-4. About production]
(Direction mode)

Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of performance modes for producing performances related to game states, and is configured to be able to move between the performance modes. Specifically, there are provided a normal production mode, a time saving production mode, a latent probability production mode, and a probability variable production mode corresponding to each of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent certainty state, and the probability variable state. In each production mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of decorative patterns is displayed with different background production, so that the player can grasp what kind of game state he is currently staying. It has become.

The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (production state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of production modes. Effect control unit 24 (CPU241), the specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), specifically to the effect control command including the game state information managed by the main control unit 20 side Based on this, the current game state is grasped in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side, and transition control between a plurality of types of presentation modes is possible. As the specific effect control command as described above, there are, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative design designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Notice production)

Next, the advance notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, Various related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result It is configured to be able to control the appearance of such a "notice effect". Such a notice effect is used as a "promotion effect" to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (hereinafter referred to as "expectation to win"), and to arouse the player's expectation of winning. work. Typical advance notice effects include "ready effect", "pseudo-continuous effect", and "pre-reading effect". The effect control unit 24 functions as a notice effect control means capable of controlling the execution (appearance) of these effects.

"Reach production" refers to a production mode with a reach state (variation display mode with a reach state: reach fluctuation pattern), specifically, to derive and display the final game result via the reach state Say the production mode. The ready-to-win effects include multiple types of ready-to-win effects associated with winning expectations. For example, in some cases, the degree of winning expectation is relatively higher than when the normal reach effect appears. Such reach performance is called 'super reach performance'. Many of these "super reach" have relatively longer presentation time (fluctuation time) than normal reach in order to arouse expectation of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes a plurality of types of reach effects such as super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of these super reach 1 to 4 is "super reach 1 < super reach 2 < super Reach 3 < Super Reach 4” relationship.

"Pseudo-continuous effect" refers to a mode of production accompanied by a pseudo-continuous change display state (pseudo-continuous change) of decorative patterns. It refers to a variable display mode in which a part or all of the symbols are once temporarily stopped, and the display operation is repeated once or more than once, such as executing the re-variable display operation of the decorative symbols from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "pre-reading forewarning effect (continuous forewarning effect)" that is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Such a "pseudo-run" basically has a rate of occurrence (appearance rate) that increases the expectation of winning as the number of pseudo-fluctuations increases. It is made easy to select an effect for arousing expectations such as reach.

"Forward-reading notice effect" mainly refers to the pending display mode and advance This is a presentation mode in which the degree of winning expectation can be notified in advance using the background presentation or the like of the symbol variation display game executed immediately before the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game. In addition, in the pattern variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", there are various effects such as so-called "SU (step-up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "resurrection effect", and "premier notice effect". It occurs, and it is designed to excite the game content.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the "holding change notice effect" as an example of the look-ahead notice effect will be described.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display effect or advance notice effect is displayed). display area) is provided, and in the display area on the lower side of the screen, a reservation display area 76 (reservation display portions a1 to d1) that displays the number of operation reservation balls on the special symbol 1 side and a special symbol A reservation display area 77 (reservation display portions a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation reservation balls on the second side is provided. As for the presence or absence of the operation pending ball, that effect is reported by a predetermined pending display mode. In FIG. 4, the presence or absence of the operation retention ball is lit (with operation retention ball: “○ (white circle)” in the illustration), or in the off state (no operation retention ball: dashed circle in the illustration). It shows an example in which information about the number of balls in operation is notified.

The display (suspension display) regarding the presence or absence of the operation reserve ball is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (the order of winning). It is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) active holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active holding ball currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game pending K which is currently being played is placed on the icon of the strike seat J appears. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest pending a1 or a2 icon (icon image) displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is the pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the striker J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation pending ball occurs, from the main control unit 20, the pre-reading judgment information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation holding balls at the time of the pre-reading judgment (the number of the existing operation holding balls including the operation holding ball that occurred this time) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 22).
In the case of this embodiment, the pending addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the pending addition command can specify the upper byte side data that can specify the number of operation pending balls at the time of prefetching judgment, and the prefetching judgment information. It consists of lower byte side data.

Here, as can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, based on the occurrence of a winning prize on the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 and a new reserved ball, the prediction of the reserved ball is performed. As a judgment, a jackpot lottery for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball is performed. As will be described later, the main control unit 20 reserves and stores information representing the result of the big-hit lottery performed as such prefetch determination in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 .
The information of the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of the prefetch determination is used for selecting (lottery) the pattern variation pattern in the pattern variation display game, and can be rephrased as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control unit 20 carries out the pre-reading determination and holds and stores the resulting “variation pattern selection information” in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 .

When the effect control unit 24 receives the pending addition command transmitted by the main control unit 20, based on the prefetch determination information included therein, as part of the display control processing related to the pending display, "prefetching preview effect" is performed. Effect control processing related to is performed. Concretely, a "pre-reading notice lottery" is carried out to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is, specifically, the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot lottery result at the start of variation) executed when the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20, This is game information obtained by pre-reading and judging the fluctuation pattern at the time of fluctuation start. That is, this information includes at least the information (prefetching winning/losing information) that prefetches the winning/losing lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and the information that prefetches the pattern lottery result (prefetching pattern information) and the fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation. Information (prefetched variation pattern information) obtained by prefetching the pattern can be included. What kind of information is included in the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the contents to be notified by the pre-reading notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the pending addition command includes prefetch hit/loss information, prefetch pattern information, and prefetch variation pattern information.

It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead judgment when the operation reserve ball is generated is not necessarily the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation reserve ball is actually used for the fluctuation display operation. no. For example, representatively explaining the case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "super reach 1", in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is called "super reach 1" It is possible to specify that it is not the type of reach production itself, but the "super reach type" that is the gist of it.

In the case of this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon targeted for the pre-reading notice is, for example, a normal holding display. (Normal pending display mode) can change from white (normal pending display mode) to pending display (special pending display mode) with blue, green, red, and danger patterns (or special colors and patterns such as rainbow colors) for advance notice display (special pending display mode) System" pre-reading notice effect (also referred to as "holding change notice") is performed.
FIG. 4 shows an example in which the operation holding ball of the hatched holding display portion b1 has changed to a special holding display. Here, the display of blue, green, red, and danger pattern of the pending icon means that the expectation of winning is high in this order, and especially the display of the pending icon with the danger pattern has an extremely high expectation of winning the jackpot. It is supposed to be a premium pending icon that will be displayed.

(Direction means)

Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine 1 . The directing means may be stimulus transmission means capable of exhibiting directing effects by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations. light production means), a sound generator such as a speaker 46 (sound generator 46a: sound production means), a production display device such as a liquid crystal display device 36 (display means), a pressure device that conveys contact pressure to the operator's body, Typical examples are a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual presentation effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the sense of sight like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display device). When it is called an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that produces effects by image display, and devices that produce effects by means other than images, such as 7-segment displays, are included in the concept of the above-mentioned effect display device.

<4. Processing of Main Control Unit>

Next, processing performed by the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be described. The processing of the main control unit 20 mainly consists of predetermined main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 5) and timer interrupt processing (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 18) started by a regular interrupt from CTC. and

[4-1. Main control side main processing]

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing main processing on the main control side.
The main processing on the main control side is started when a system reset occurs due to a system reset signal from the power supply board during recovery from a power outage or power failure, or when the control program goes out of control, the watchdog timer function ( WDT) is exhibited and the CPU 201 is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main processing is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes initial setting processing necessary for starting the game operation, such as initial setting of register values of each unit including the CPU 201. (step S101).

(initial setting processing)

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process in step S101.
In FIG. 6, when the above system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 sets itself to the interrupt disabled state in step S201, and then, as stack pointer setting processing in step S202, the value of the stack pointer of the RAM 203 is transferred to the stack area. Execute the setting process corresponding to the final address of Then, in step S203, the RAM protection is invalidated, and the prohibition area of the RAM 203 out-of-designated-area travel prohibition function is invalidated.

Next, in step S204, the CPU 201 executes processing for turning off the security signal, setting value display, and firing permission signal. Here, the security signal is a signal output to the hall computer HC through the frame external common terminal board 21, and functions as a signal for notifying the hall computer HC of a state such as a setting being changed. Turning off the set value display means turning off the display of the set value Ve on the setting/performance indicator 97 .
The firing permission signal is a signal output from the payout control board 29 to the firing control board 28 as described above, and the CPU 201 instructs the payout control board 29 to turn off the firing permission signal.
Here, turning off the security signal and turning off the setting value display are countermeasures against turning on/off the power during setting change. That is, since the power may have been turned off while the set value Ve was being displayed in the setting change process, the set value display and the security signal are temporarily turned off.

In step S205 following step S204, the CPU 201 executes power supply abnormality check processing.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the power failure check process, the WDT timer is cleared (step S11), and it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is ON (step S12). The power failure signal is a signal output from the power supply board, and indicates that the power failure signal OFF is at a normal level and that the power failure signal ON is not at a normal level (that is, is abnormal). If the power failure signal is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S101 shown in FIG. 5 and redoes the main control side main processing from the beginning. That is, when an abnormality is recognized in the power supply, the main processing on the main control side is reset.
If the power supply abnormality signal is not ON, the CPU 201 terminates the power supply abnormality check process because no abnormality is recognized in the power supply.

Returning to FIG. 6, the CPU 201 performs various setting processes at the time of startup in step S206 in response to completion of the power abnormality check process in step S205. In the setting process of step S206, for example, an interrupt mode setting process for setting a predetermined interrupt mode, an internal hard random number setting process for activating an internal hard random number circuit, and the like are executed.

In step S207 following step S206, the CPU 201 sets the activation waiting time of the sub-control board (effect control unit 24). Then, through the processing of steps S208 to S210, it waits until the set activation waiting time elapses. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the set start-up waiting time (step S208), the power failure check process (step S209) is executed, and if the start-up waiting time is not zero (step S210: ≠0), step S208 return to the process of Activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed by the standby process based on such an activation waiting time.

In step S<b>210 , when the activation waiting time has elapsed (waiting time=0), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S<b>211 and transmits a standby screen display command to the effect control unit 24 .
In response to this standby screen display command, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a predetermined screen, such as a screen on which characters such as "Please Wait..." are arranged, which is determined at the time of activation. Control for execution.

In response to the execution of the transmission process of step S211, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S212, and performs payout control while executing the power supply abnormality check process (S212: see FIG. 7) by the processes of step S212 and step S213. It waits for a power-on signal from the board 29 to be sent. This power-on signal is a signal output when the payout control board 29 normally starts up, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts normally. Accordingly, when the payout control board 29 does not function normally due to some trouble, the processing of steps S212 and S213 is repeated and the game operation is not started. Therefore, an abnormal payout such as failure to pay out prize balls does not occur, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.
When the power-on signal is sent (step S213: ON), the CPU 201 ends the initial setting process of step S101.

(Processing after initial setting)

After completing the initial setting process, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S102 shown in FIG.
In step S102, the CPU 201 acquires the information of the input port n (that is, the predetermined input port) and copies it to the W register.
Here, the input port n is a 1-byte (8-bit) port, and in this example, the following signals are input. Note that "b0" to "b7" shown below represent bit positions.

b0: setting key (input signal from setting key switch 94)
b1: out-of-supply detection signal b2: counting error signal b3: disconnection detection signal 1
b4: disconnection detection signal 2
b5: door open signal (detection signal of front door open sensor 61)
b6: RAM clear button (input signal from RAM clear switch 98)
b7: Power-on signal and dispensing communication confirmation signal

Here, for the setting key b0, "0" means that the setting key switch 94 is OFF, and "1" means that the setting key switch 94 is ON. As for the door open signal b5, "0" means that the door is closed (the front frame 2 is closed), and "1" means that the door is open. Further, regarding the RAM clear button b6, "0" means that the RAM clear switch 98 is OFF (button non-operated state), and "1" means that the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (button operated state).

In step S103 following step S102, the CPU 201 masks the value of the W register. Specifically, the values required for determining the migration of setting change processing (S115), RAM clear processing (at least S117 and S118), setting confirmation processing (S109), and backup restoration processing (S111) described below. A setting key (b0), a RAM clear button (b6), and a door open signal (b5) are masked.
As can be understood from the above description, the conditions for transitioning to the setting change process are that, at startup, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the operating state with the front frame 2 opened. ing.
Further, in this example, the condition for shifting to the RAM clear process is, in terms of operation, that the setting key is in a non-operating state and the RAM clear button is in an operating state at the time of startup.
In terms of operation, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation process are that the front frame 2 is opened, the setting key is in the operating state, and the RAM clear button is in the non-operating state.
Further, as a condition for transitioning to the backup restoration process, in terms of operation, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are to be in a non-operating state at the time of startup.

FIG. 8 shows the relationship between each determination condition in terms of operation and the value of the W register when shifting to these setting change processing, RAM clear processing, setting confirmation processing, and backup restoration processing.
FIG. 8 shows the order of setting change processing, RAM clearing processing, setting confirmation processing, and transition determination to backup restoration processing.
The determination of the transition to the first setting change process is performed under the following conditions as shown in FIG. : ON, therefore, the conditions for the value of the W register are the 0th bit: 1, the 5th bit: 1, and the 6th bit: 1.
The determination of the transition to the second RAM clearing process is performed by determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON and the value of the W register is 1 at the 6th bit. Here, in this example, the determination of transition to the RAM clearing process is performed when the conditions for transitioning to the setting change process are not met. In addition, the RAM clear switch 98 must be OFF in order to shift to the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process. From these points, if the condition for transition to the setting change process is not satisfied and the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, it can be estimated that the transition operation to the RAM clear process is being performed. For this reason, in this example, as described above, in judging the transition to the RAM clearing process, in terms of operation, it is only necessary to judge whether the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (6th bit: 1 or not). and

The judgment conditions for the transition to the third setting confirmation process are set key: ON, door open: ON, and RAM clear switch 98: OFF. : 1, 6th bit: 0 is the condition.
Further, the determination conditions for the determination of the transition to the fourth backup restoration process are set key: OFF, RAM clear switch 98: OFF, and accordingly, the W register value is 0:0, 6th bit: 0. conditional.

Here, regarding the backup restoration process, the transition condition for performing only the backup restoration process without going through the setting confirmation process is described as the setting key: OFF and the RAM clear switch 98: OFF in terms of operation as described above. However, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed, the condition for determining whether or not to simply perform the backup restoration process is that the backup flag, which will be described later, is ON (step S106). (Refer to the judgment process of ).

Returning to FIG.
In step S104, the CPU 201 executes a setting change condition satisfaction determination process in response to performing the masking process in step S103. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the masked value (3 bits) in step S103 is "111" in order to determine whether or not to shift to the setting change mode.
When the masked value is "111" and a positive result is obtained that the setting change condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process of step S115. That is, processing for newly setting the set value Ve is performed according to the operation of the RAM clear button or setting key.
Details of the setting change processing in step S115 will be explained later.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the setting key switch 94, the front door open sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98, in other words, the respective detection signals used to determine the transition to the setting change mode Signals are input to the same input port of the main control unit 20, and it is collectively determined whether or not the values of the input detection signals satisfy predetermined conditions.
As a result, the number of judgment processes can be reduced in comparison with the case of individually judging whether or not the value of each detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition for judging transition to the setting change mode.

In response to executing the setting change process in step S115, the CPU 201 executes RAM clearing process in step S116. This RAM clearing process is a process for initializing values in a predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203, and a setting for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the end of the setting change process executed in step S115. This includes processing for transmitting a change end command, the details of which will be described later.

Subsequently, in step S104, if the value after masking in step S103 is not "111" and a negative result that the setting change condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S105 to Determine whether or not Specifically, at least it is determined whether or not the "setting value" stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is a value outside the use range Ru (outside the range of "1", "2", and "6" in this example). do.
Here, the value handled by the CPU 201 regarding the set value Ve is the set value Vd. The set value Vd is a value corresponding to the set value Ve. In this example, it is a 1-byte value. Values from (0) to 02H(3) are defined. In addition, "H" means a hexadecimal number (the same shall apply hereinafter). In this example, the set value Vd=00H represents the set value Ve="1", the set value Vd=01H represents the set value Ve="2", and the set value Vd=02H represents the set value Ve="6". assumed. In the main control unit 20, the setting value Vd is mainly handled as the "setting value", and this setting value Vd is stored in the "setting value" storage area in the work area of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 20. .
In the determination process of step S105, it is determined whether or not the set value Vd stored in the work area is within the range of 00H to 02H.

If it is determined in step S105 that the set value is outside the use range Ru (that is, outside the normal range) and the RAM is abnormal, the CPU 201 performs processing to wait for the power to be turned on again after step S112. Afterwards.
Specifically, in step S112, the CPU 201, as a command transmission process when the power is turned on again, gives an effect control command (setting Waiting for change command) to the production control unit 24. When a RAM abnormality is detected at startup, the setting change mode is forcibly entered, and the change (setting) of the set value Ve is accepted. For this reason, the CPU 201 first notifies the effect control section 24 side that the setting change wait command is used to shift to the setting change mode in step S112.
Receiving the setting change waiting command, the effect control unit 24 executes a screen display on the liquid crystal display device 36 for prompting the setting change operation, such as a screen including characters such as "Please open the door and change the setting". Let At this time, the effect control unit 24 may perform control to cause the corresponding light effect (for example, lighting of all LEDs in the light display device 45a) and sound effect to appear together with the screen display.

In step S113 following step S112, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF), and then repeats the error display process in step S114. In the error display process of step S114, a process for causing the setting/performance indicator 97 to display an error is performed. This error display process is repeated until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, the processes after step S101 are executed again as the main control side main process. At this time, if an operation to shift to the setting change mode has been performed according to the screen display or the like, the shift to the setting change mode is performed, and the RAM abnormal state is resolved.

If it is determined in step S105 that the set value is not outside the usable range Ru and that there is no RAM abnormality, the CPU 201 advances to step S106 to determine whether the backup flag is ON (backup flag=5AH in this example). is ON state).
In the gaming machine 1, when the power is cut off, the information stored in the RAM 203 is backed up by the power check/backup process (step S901, see FIG. 19) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process. If the backup process has been properly performed at the time of power shutdown, the backup flag is turned ON (see step S1010 in FIG. 19). Therefore, in step S106, the backup flag is checked to determine whether or not backup recovery is possible. Specifically, in step S106, it is determined whether or not the backup flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is in the ON state (5AH).

When determining in step S106 that the backup flag is not ON, the CPU 201 advances the processing to step S112 described above. As a result, when the backup return condition is not satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly entered in the same manner as in the case where the RAM abnormality described above is recognized.

Here, as described above, the determination process in step S106 corresponds to the process of determining whether the transition to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed is possible regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is ON, the CPU 201 determines in step S107 whether or not the RAM clear condition (condition for shifting to RAM clear processing) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1".
When the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1" and a positive result indicating that the RAM clear condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 advances the processing to step S116 described above. As a result, the above-described RAM clear processing is executed.

Here, as can be seen by referring to the route from steps S107 to S116 described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to clear the RAM without changing the settings. This makes it possible to clear data other than the data related to the set value Ve, such as payout-related data in the RAM 203 .

Further, in step S107, if the value of the 6th bit of the W register is not "1" and a negative result is obtained that the RAM clear condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S108 and sets the confirmation condition ( It is determined whether or not the transition condition to the setting confirmation process) is established. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the W register after being masked in step S103 is "110".
If the value of the W register after masking is "110" and a positive result is obtained that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 executes the setting confirmation process in step S109, and advances the process to step S110. In other words, the process shifts to backup restoration.
The details of the setting confirmation process in step S109 will be explained again.

On the other hand, if the value of the W register after masking is not "110" and a negative result is obtained that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 skips the setting confirmation processing of step S109 and proceeds to step S110. .

In step S110, the CPU 201 performs processing of transmitting a predetermined effect control command corresponding to the time of backup return to the effect control unit 24 as command transmission processing at the time of backup return.

In step S111 following step S110, the CPU 201 performs backup recovery processing.
The backup restoration process is a process of restoring the operation before the power shutdown after the power is turned on based on the memory contents of the RAM 203 backed up at the time of the power shutdown. Specifically, the CPU 201 restores the stack pointer before the power shutdown, and performs processing for starting the game operation from the processing state at the time of the power shutdown.
Also, in the backup recovery process, a power failure recovery display command (OB03H) for instructing information display corresponding to the backup recovery is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in the main loop pre-processing of step S119 to be described later. Therefore, a process of storing the low-order byte data of the power failure recovery display command in the register is executed.

When the backup restoration process of step S111 is executed, or when the RAM clear process of step S116 described above is executed (that is, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are executed, or only the RAM clear process is executed) , the CPU 201 proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, the CPU 201 sets a CTC for periodically generating a timer interrupt every predetermined time such as 4 ms.
By performing the setting process of step S117, an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output thereafter, and the main control side timer interrupt process is executed.

In subsequent step S118, the CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting an effect control command for instructing the start of the game to the effect control unit 24, then advances the process to step S119 to execute main loop pre-processing, and then step S120. main loop processing.
Note that the main loop pre-processing in step S119 will be described later.

(main loop processing)

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the main loop processing of step S120.
In the main loop processing of FIG. 9, the CPU 201 sets itself to an interrupt disabled state in step S601, and executes random number update processing in subsequent step S602. In this random number update process, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game (random numbers related to the big win lottery that circulates within a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery) random number) and random number related to the subsidized lottery (random number for the subsidized hit judgment used for the subsidized lottery))) Random number used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special symbol judgment , initial value random number for auxiliary hit determination) and the random number for the variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as various random number counters used for the symbol lottery related to the big win lottery, the auxiliary winning lottery, or the variation pattern lottery, a counter for generating the initial value of the random number counter for special symbol determination, a special symbol determination A random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a random number counter for auxiliary hit determination, a random number counter for variation pattern, and the like are provided. These counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. In the random number update process of step S602, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial values of the special symbol determination random number counter and the auxiliary hit determination random number counter described above, the variation pattern random number counter, etc. are updated, and the above various generate soft random numbers for . For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number counter for the fluctuation pattern is "0 to 238", the value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the value of the random number for the fluctuation pattern of the RAM 203, and the obtained value is After adding "1", it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding "1" to the acquired value is "239", "0" is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation are similarly updated.

After completing the random number update process in step S602, the CPU 201 saves the values of all registers in step S603, and then performs performance display monitor tally division process in step S604.
This performance display monitor aggregate division process is a process of calculating a value as the above-described performance information (here, for example, a value as the above-described "normal time ratio information"). As described above, the value of the normal ratio information is calculated using the total number of payouts and the total number of out balls. Lower starting port 35, general winning port 43, big winning port 50) is calculated based on the result of counting the number of winning game balls, and the total number of out balls is the number of game balls discharged from the out port 49. Find by counting.
The number of winning balls and the number of out balls are counted in the later-described input management process (see step S904 in FIG. 18) in the main control side timer interrupt process. The CPU 201 calculates a value as normal time ratio information in step S604 based on the count values obtained by counting the number of winning balls and the number of out balls performed on the timer interrupt processing side. As described above, the calculated value as the normal time ratio information is stored in a predetermined area (measurement information storage area) of the RAM 203 .
The value of the normal time ratio information calculated in this way is displayed on the setting/performance indicator 97 by the later-described performance display monitor display process (see step S916 in FIG. 18) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In step S605 following step S604, the CPU 201 performs all register restoration processing, sets itself to the interrupt enabled state in step S606, and returns to step S601.

Thus, in the main loop process of step S123, the processes of steps S601 to S606 are repeated in an infinite loop. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S601 to S606 except while the intermittent timer interrupt processing is being performed.

(setting change processing)

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the setting change process in step S115.
In this setting change process, a process for setting the set value Ve based on the operation, and an effect control command for notifying that the setting is being changed or that the setting change has been completed (completed) are sent to the effect control unit 24. Processing and the like for transmission are performed.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first executes a process of transmitting a setting changing command (BA76H) to the effect control section 24 in step S401.
In response to this setting change command, the effect control unit 24 displays a screen on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the setting is being changed, such as a screen on which characters such as "setting is being changed" are arranged. A process is performed to cause the setting to be executed, or to output a corresponding sound from the speaker 46 while the setting is being changed. Furthermore, at this time, the effect control unit 24 may light predetermined LEDs (for example, all LEDs) in the above-described light generating means (light display device 45a) according to a predetermined lighting pattern.
In addition, the processing executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to various effect control commands transmitted by the CPU 201 related to the setting change, including the command during setting change, will be described later (FIG. 52A, etc.).

In subsequent step S402, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF state), and then sets system operation status=2 in step S403. This system operation status is information for at least identifying whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been passed at the time of startup. A value (for example, "0") indicates that the setting change process has not been performed.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 5, in this example, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process (S116) are executed, and when only the RAM clear process is executed without executing the setting change process, the RAM Although the clear processing (program) is shared, by using the above system operation status, it is possible to execute the processing separately in the former case and the latter case while sharing the RAM clear processing program. .

In step S404 following step S403, the CPU 201 executes processing for acquiring the setting value. Specifically, the set value Vd (one of 00H to 02H in this example) stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired.

The processing from step S405 following step S404 updates the display value on the setting/performance display 97 in accordance with the forward feeding operation of the set value Ve (operation of the RAM clear button), or completes the setting change operation (operation of the setting key). operation) to set the set value Ve.
First, in step S405, the CPU 201 decrements the acquired set value Vd by 1 ("set value -1"), and in subsequent step S406, determines whether or not the set value Vd is greater than 1 (set value > 1). ). In this example, since the maximum value of the setting value Vd is 02H, it is not determined that the setting value>1 in step S406, which is executed for the first time after the setting change process is started.
In step S406, if the set value Vd is not greater than 1, the CPU 201 sets the carry flag (on) in step S407, and increments the set value Vd by 1 ("set value + 1") in step S408. ), and in step S409, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is ON. If the carry flag is ON, the CPU 201 executes a setting change command acquisition process in step S411, and transmits the setting change command to the effect control unit 24 by the following command process in step S412.
The setting change command will be described later.
After executing the command transmission process in step S412, the CPU 201 executes the output management process in step S413. Through this output management process, the setting/performance display 97 displays the setting value Ve corresponding to the current setting value Vd. Details of the output management processing in step S413 will be described later.

In step S414 following step S413, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF, that is, whether or not the setting key switch 94 is OFF. It is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 98 is not ON, the CPU 201 executes the output management process of step S413 again.
By the processing of steps S413 to S415, the CPU 201 waits until either the setting key or the change switch is turned ON, and during the standby, causes the setting/performance display 97 to display the current set value Ve by the processing of step S413. Repeat the process for

In step S415, if the change switch is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S406.
If the set value Vd acquired at the start of the setting change process in step S115 (the set value Vd that was being set until then) is 02H, it is determined that the change switch is ON in step S415. In the process of step S406, which is executed accordingly, a determination result of "set value>1" is obtained (because -1 is decremented in step S405, but +1 is decremented in step S408). The setting value Vd should be returned to 00H in response to a change operation (forward feeding operation) performed when the setting value Vd is 02H. Therefore, if it is determined in step S406 that "set value>1", the carry flag setting process in step S407 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S408. As a result, the carry flag is determined to be OFF in step S409, so the process proceeds to step S410 and the set value Vd is returned to 00H ("set value←0").
In response to returning the set value Vd to 00H in step S410, the CPU 201 advances the process to step S413 via the processes of steps S411 and S412. That is, in this case, the setting/performance indicator 97 displays the setting value Ve ("1" in this example) corresponding to the setting value Vd=00H.

Through the above process, while the setting is being changed, the set value Vd is cyclically changed within the range of 00H to 02H (within the use range Ru) according to the change operation, and the changed set value Vd is changed. The set value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance indicator 97 .

Further, the setting change time command transmitted in step S412 is a command for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the setting value Vd being selected during the setting change process. It is a command in which information representing Ve is stored.
Through the series of processes of steps S406 to S415 described above, every time the setting value Ve being selected is switched by the forward feeding operation of the setting value, a setting change time command reflecting the setting value Ve after switching is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. will be
10, the CPU 201 uses a set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) to acquire the set value Ve corresponding to the set value Vd, although the illustration of FIG. 10 is omitted.

When it is determined in step S415 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S416 and executes processing for saving the setting value Vd. That is, a process of storing the set value Vd in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 203 is executed.
The CPU 201 ends the setting change process of step S115 in response to executing the save process of step S416.

FIG. 11 is a flow chart of the output management process in step S413.
First, the CPU 201 executes security signal output processing in step S501. Specifically, a process for outputting a security signal to the hall computer HC through the external common terminal board 21 for frame is performed.
In subsequent step S502, the CPU 201 executes processing for outputting 0 to the LED common port, that is, the common port of the LED as the setting/performance display device 97, and acquires display data from the 7-segment decode table in step S503. Execute the process. That is, it is a process of acquiring display data of set values Ve (“1”, “2”, and “6”) based on set values Vd.
When 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the setting/performance indicator 97 is turned off (no display), the significance of which will be described later.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a 7-segment decode table, and FIG. 13 shows an example of the relationship between the segment configuration and segment display patterns in the setting/performance display 97. In FIG.
The 7-segment decoding table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20. FIG.

In this example, the seven segments in the setting/performance indicator 97 are numbered from 0 to 6 as shown in FIG. 13A. The setting/performance indicator 97 is provided with a DP (dot point) display section (light emitting section) as well as these seven segments 0 to 6, and the DP display section is numbered "7". ing.
As the 7-segment display data, a total of 10 pieces are prepared, from the display data "SEG_0" representing the numerical value "0" to the display data "SEG_9" representing the numerical value "9". The display data is 1-byte (8-bit) data, and if the least significant bit position is the first bit position, the first bit position is segment "0" display/non-display (light emission/non-light emission). represents Similarly, the second bit position is segment "1", the third bit position is segment "2", the fourth bit position is segment "3", the fifth bit position is segment "4", and the sixth bit position is segment "4". bit position indicates display/non-display of segment "5", and the seventh bit position indicates display/non-display of segment "6".
Also, in the display data in this example, the 8th bit position indicates display/non-display of DP (“7”).

The 7-segment decode table shown in FIG. 12 is configured so that the corresponding display data, specifically the display data of SEG_1, SEG_2, and SEG_6 are obtained from the set values Vd=00H, 01H, and 02H. It is configured.
Specifically, in the 7-segment decode table of this example, at least an area for storing display data for each set value Vd of 00H to 05H is secured, such as the address area of "6203" to "6208" in the figure. The display data SEG_1 (“06” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=00H is stored in the uppermost layer area (the area with the lowest address number) in this area, and the set value is stored in the second area. Display data SEG_2 ("5B" in the figure) corresponding to Vd=01H is stored, and display data SEG_6 ("7D" in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd=02H is stored in the third area.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=05H are provided for display purposes. "00" is stored as data, but its significance will be explained again.
In the 7-segment decode table of this example, display data SEG_E ("79") for displaying "E" representing a set value error is stored in the seventh area. A setting value error can be notified through the setting/performance indicator 97 in response to a case where the setting value Vd indicates an abnormal value such as a value outside the use range Ru. .

Returning to FIG.
The CPU 201 performs a process of outputting the display data acquired from the 7-segment decoding table by the process of step S503 to the setting/performance display device 97 in step S504.
The subsequent processing of steps S505 to S508 is processing for dynamically lighting (intermittently lighting) the LED for displaying the set value Ve in the setting/performance display 97 . Specifically, in step S505, the CPU 201 increments the LED counter by 1, and in subsequent step S506, determines whether or not the 0th and 1st bits (lower 2 bits) of the LED counter are "11". Here, the low-order 2 bits of the LED counter become "11" when the increment process in step S505 is performed multiple times of 4.
In step S506, if the 1st and 0th bits of the LED counter are "11", the CPU 201 proceeds to step S507, outputs data designating a segment for displaying the set value to the LED common port, and outputs the data for displaying in step S508. Execute timer count processing. By executing the output process in step S507, the setting/performance display device 97 displays the set value Ve based on the display data output in step S504. This display state continues for the time set by the display timer in step S508 (4 ms in this example).

The output management process shown in FIG. 11 ends when the process of step S509 following the timer count process of step S508 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. And if the change switch is ON, the output management process of step S413 is repeated. As described above, in step S502, 0 is output to the LED common port, so the lighting state of the set value display LED started in step S507 is canceled by execution of step S502. Since the LED counter is incremented by 1 in step S505, it is determined in step S506 that the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter are not "11". executed. That is, after the process of step S507 is executed and the set value display LED is lit for a period of at least 4 ms, until the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter become "11" again, that is, in this example, The LED is turned off for at least 4ms×3=12ms.
In this manner, dynamic lighting is realized in which the set value display LED is intermittently lit at a predetermined cycle.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 executes input data creation processing in step S509 in response to execution of timer count processing in step S508.
This input data creation process is executed by calling the same process of step S902 in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), for example. As will be described later, the input data created in the input data creation process includes input data of the RAM clear switch 98 indicating whether or not there is an operation to sequentially feed the set value Ve, and setting key switch 98 indicating whether or not there is an operation to complete the setting change. 94 input data are included.
As can be seen from FIG. 10, the determination of whether or not there has been an operation to complete the setting change (S414) and the determination of whether or not there has been an operation to feed the set value Ve forward (S415) are executed after the output management process of step S413. By executing the input data creation process in step S509, the data required for these determination processes are obtained in advance.

(RAM clear processing)

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the RAM clear processing shown in FIG.
First, in step S601, the CPU 201 executes an area RAM initialization process. The initialization process in step S601 is a process of initializing (clearing) values in a predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203. FIG. However, in the initialization processing of step S601, the storage area of the set value Vd in the work area is excluded from initialization.

Note that the performance information described above is stored in an area outside the use area of the RAM 203, and is therefore not cleared in the initialization process of step S601.
The objects to be cleared by the RAM clear processing are the data in the RAM area (normal data storage area) such as various flags, timers, counters, etc. necessary for normal game progress. These data include, for example: That is, data related to the game state designation (normal state, probability variable state, time saving state, latent probability state, etc., the game state flag that specifies the current game state), a flag that specifies whether it is in a winning game (condition device operation flag), various data related to the execution of winning games (current number of rounds, maximum number of rounds, etc.), data related to jackpot lottery results (jackpot judgment flag: winning lottery result information, special pattern judgment data: pattern lottery result information) , Suspension data related to operation suspension balls (number of operation suspension balls, various random numbers used for jackpot lottery, various random numbers used for auxiliary winning lottery, random numbers for fluctuation patterns), special symbol operation status, game progress Timer (special pattern accessory operation timer), input/output data related to switches and sensors, various winning counters that count the number of winning balls in the winning opening, flag specifying the presence or absence of electric support state (open extension flag), electric Electric support number counter that counts the remaining number of support, counter that counts the remaining number of times in high probability state (special figure probability variable number counter, general figure probability variable number counter), various error flags (excluding RAM error flag), and payout related data, etc. In any case, when the RAM clear process is executed, all data other than specific data (set value Vd and performance information) are set to the initial state.

Here, as can be understood from the description of FIG. 5 above, when the setting change process (S115) is executed, the process proceeds to step S116 and the RAM clear process is executed.
The setting value Vd can be changed in the setting change process. When the setting value Vd is changed, there is a possibility that values other than the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 will not match the changed setting value Vd. Therefore, when the setting change process is performed, the area other than the set value Vd in the work area is cleared (initialized) by executing the RAM clear process.

In response to the execution of the initialization process of step S601, the CPU 201 sets 30 s to the RAM clear notification timer in step S602 and executes the process for setting the deviation to this special figure. The RAM clear notification timer is a timer for setting the RAM clear notification time executed by the effect control unit 24 according to the RAM clear command transmitted in the processing of step S803 in FIG. set. In addition, the special figure referred to here means, for example, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 described above.

In step S603 following step S602, the CPU 201 determines whether the above-described system operation status is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been performed after activation.
If the system operation status is "2", the CPU 201 executes the processing corresponding to the setting change processing in steps S604 to S612.
If the system operation status is not "2", the CPU 201 advances the process to step S613, stores the lower byte data of the RAM clear command in the register, and ends the RAM clear process of step S116.
The operation of storing the lower byte data of the command in the register as described above functions as the operation of designating the command type to be transmitted in step S804 of the main loop preprocessing (FIG. 17), which will be described later.

After going through the setting change process, the CPU 201 first resets the system operation status to "0" in step S604, executes the process of acquiring the setting change end command (BA77H) in step S605, and executes the command acquisition process in step S606. A setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by transmission processing.

The processing of steps S607 to S612 subsequent to step S606 is processing related to the display of the set value Ve on the setting/performance indicator 97. FIG.
First, in step S607, the CPU 201 outputs data designating a segment for setting value display to the LED common port, and in subsequent step S608, retrieves display data corresponding to the setting value Vd from the 7-segment decode table (see FIG. 13). DP is added to the display data in step S609, that is, the value of the 7th bit position of the display data is set to "1". Output to the setting/performance indicator 97 .

The processing of steps S612 and S613 following step S611 is processing for continuing the display state of the set values Ve and DP on the setting/performance display 97 for a predetermined time (1 s in this example). Specifically, the CPU 201 repeatedly executes display timer count processing in step S612 (for example, timer count processing with a period of 4 ms similar to the previous step S508 (see FIG. 11)) until it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed. do.

If it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed, the CPU 201 executes the storage processing in step S613 and ends the RAM clear processing in step S116.

As can be understood from the description so far, when the setting change process of step S115 is executed and the setting change completion operation is performed (step S412 in FIG. 10: Y), in the RAM clear process of step S116 A setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (S605, S606), and notification of the end of the setting change is made.
In the case of this example, the setting change end command notifies the effect control section 24 that the setting change has ended, and does not have the function of notifying the set value Ve set in the setting change process. .
In this example, the setting value Ve set in the setting change process is notified to the effect control unit 24 by a setting value command transmitted in the process of step S808 in FIG. 17 (main loop pre-processing) described later.

(Setting confirmation process)

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process in step S109.
The setting confirmation process is a process for confirming and displaying the setting value Ve being set.
In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first sets the fraud information timer to 30 seconds in step S701. The fraud information timer is a timer for managing the output time of the security signal to the hole computer HC.
In subsequent step S702, a process of acquiring current set value information is performed. That is, the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM is acquired.

In step S703 following step S702, the CPU 201 executes processing for acquiring setting value data from the setting value offset conversion table.

FIG. 16 shows an example of the set value offset conversion table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control section 20. As shown in FIG.
The set value offset conversion table converts the set value Vd (00H to 02H) to the set value Ve (“1
, '2', '6') as a table for conversion into identification data ('SETNUM1' to 'SETNUM6').
In this example, the set value offset conversion table has at least an area for storing the identification data of the set value Ve for each of the set values Vd of 00H to 05H, such as the address areas of "6215" to "6220" in the drawing. The identification data (“00” in the figure) of the setting value Ve “1” corresponding to the setting value Vd=00H is stored in the uppermost area of this area, and the setting value Vd=01H is stored in the second area. The identification data (“01” in the drawing) of the corresponding setting value Ve “2” is stored, and the identification data (“05” in the drawing) of the setting value Ve “6” corresponding to the setting value Vd=02H is stored in the third area. stored.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=03H, the fifth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the setting value Vd=05H have the setting value "00" is stored as the identification data of Ve, but its significance will be explained again.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 acquires the above identification data as "set value data" by the acquisition process in step S703.

In response to the execution of the acquisition process of step S703, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting confirmation command (BA6xH) in step S704, and transmits the setting confirmation command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of the following step S705. Send.
In the acquisition process of step S704, the CPU 201 performs a process of including the setting value data acquired in step S703, that is, the identification data for identifying the setting value Ve being set among the current setting values in the setting checking command.
As a result, the command transmission process of step S705 is executed, so that the effect control unit 24 is notified of the fact that the setting is being checked and the current set value Ve.

The processing of steps S706 and S707 subsequent to step S705 is processing for displaying the current set value Ve on the setting/performance display 97 .
Specifically, in step S706, the CPU 201 first executes a process of acquiring set values and DP data. That is, a process of acquiring the current set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 and the DP data (“1”) in the setting/performance indicator 97 is executed. After that, the output management process of step S707 is executed. The output management process in step S707 is the same as the output management process in step S413 shown in FIG. As a result, the setting/performance indicator 97 in this case displays the value representing the current set value Ve and DP.

In step S708 following step S707, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF (the setting key switch 94 is OFF), that is, whether or not an instruction to end the setting confirmation display has been performed. If so, the output management process in step S707 is executed again. As a result, after the setting confirmation command is transmitted in step S705, the process of step S708 waits until an instruction to end the setting confirmation display is performed. The process of displaying the current set values Ve and DP on the display 97 is continued.

When it is determined that the setting key is OFF in step S708, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition processing of the setting confirmation end command (BA67H) in step S709, and transmits the setting confirmation end command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission processing of step S710. Then, the setting confirmation process of step S109 is completed.

(main loop preprocessing)

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of main loop pre-processing in step S119.
In the main loop pre-processing, the CPU 201 first executes an initialization command acquisition process in step S801, and transmits the initialization command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process in subsequent step S802. The initialize command is a command for instructing initialization (origination return) of the movable body role product motor 80c that operates the movable body as the role product.

In step S803 following step S802, the CPU 201 performs processing for acquiring transmission command data from the acquired lower byte command, and transmits the acquired command data to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing in step S804.
Here, in the acquisition process of step S803, the data of the command whose lower byte data is stored in the register in the course of the process passed after activation is acquired. Specifically, when the RAM clearing process of step S116 is performed (when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are performed, or when the setting change process is not performed and only the RAM clear process is performed), Data of the RAM clear command (BA02H) is obtained. On the other hand, if the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed (when both the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process are performed, or when only the backup restoration process is performed without the setting confirmation process), the power failure restoration is performed. Data of the display command (OB03H) is obtained.
As a result, the effect control unit 24 executes different processes depending on whether the RAM clear process is performed or the backup return process is performed.

In step S805 following step S804, the CPU 201 executes processing for transmitting the pending number of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Here, in the process of step S805, when the backup return process of step S111 is performed, the pending number of special figures 1 and 2 is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the RAM clear process of step S116 is performed. If so, the pending number is not transmitted (because the pending number information has been cleared).

The processing of steps S806 to S808 following step S805 is processing for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the current set value Ve by the set value command.
First, in step S806, the CPU 201 acquires the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as processing for acquiring current setting value information. 16) to acquire the set value data. Specifically, the identification data of the setting values Ve (“1”, “2”, and “5”) corresponding to the setting values Vd (00H to 02H) obtained in step S806 are obtained.
Then, the CPU 201 performs acquisition processing of the setting value command (F6xxH) in subsequent step S808, and transmits the setting value command to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing in step S809.
In acquisition processing in step S808, a setting value command including the identification data acquired in step S807 is acquired. With such a setting value command, it is possible to notify the present setting value Ve to the effect control section 24 .

In response to execution of the command transmission processing in step S809, the CPU 201 executes internal function register setting processing in step S810, that is, register setting processing for initial setting of various functions such as the hardware random number counting function. In S811, a process of setting the performance display monitor lighting timer to 5 seconds is executed. The performance display monitor lighting timer is a timer for managing the operation time of the operation confirmation lighting operation (blinking operation for 5 seconds in this example) when the setting/performance indicator 97 is activated.

Furthermore, in step S812 following step S811, the CPU 201 resets the system operation status to "0", and turns on the firing permission signal for the payout control board 29 in step S813. In response to this, the payout control board 29 determines that it is in the shooting permission state, outputs the permission signal to the shooting control board 28, and permits the shooting operation of the game ball by the shooting device 32. FIG. Thereby, the game ball can be shot by the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁
In this case, the discharge control board 29 receives a discharge permission signal from the main control unit 20 and permits the discharge operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which the main control unit 20 directly outputs the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 is also possible. .
After executing the process of step S813, the CPU 201 ends the main loop pre-processing of step S119.

(Advantages of set value display data table and set value conversion table as embodiments)

Here, in this embodiment, like the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. is stored.
This data table contains set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to set values Vd (“00H” to “02H”) that can be set by the setting change process (see FIG. 10). It includes certain first set value related information and second set value related information that is set value related information that is selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a set value that cannot be set by the setting change process. Specifically, as the first setting value related information, "00", "01", and "05" respectively stored at addresses "6215", "6216", and "6217" in the setting value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 correspond. , "00", "00", and "00" stored in addresses "6218", "6219", and "6220" correspond to the second set value related information.
Further, in the data table, as the first set value related information, at least specific information (that is, "00" at the address "6215") related to the set value Ve representing the stage with the lowest winning probability is stored, and the second set value related information is stored. As the value-related information, the same information as the specific information is stored.

When the set value Vd is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value Vd stored in the RAM 203 with a value representing the lowest level.
However, if it is tampered with after being rewritten, there is a risk that the corresponding information will be obtained from the data table based on the unsettable setting value Vd, and that an operation will be implemented according to the unsettable setting value.
According to the above configuration, since it is impossible to obtain information corresponding to the set value Vd that cannot be set from the data table, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and the game is fair. can increase

Further, in this embodiment, 0 is stored as the specific information described above.
As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud due to falsification of setting values by a simple method of writing specific information=0 in the setting value related information. That is, it is possible to improve the fairness of the game by a simple technique.

In the present embodiment, the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 is also set value-related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the settable set value Vd through the setting change process. Setting value related information (addresses “6203” to “6205”) and second setting value related information that is setting value related information that is selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a setting value that cannot be set by setting change processing. (addresses "6206" to "6208") are included. In the 7-segment decoding table, 0 is stored as the second set value related information.
As a result, even if the data table is referred to by the set value Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process due to fraud or some kind of malfunction, the set value display means (in this example, the setting/performance display unit 97) can be set. It is possible to prevent the value display from being performed. Specifically, in this example, data of "00", that is, "00000000" is acquired as the display data, so all the segments "0" to "6" in the seven segments for setting value display are hidden. As a result, numerical values are not displayed.
Therefore, erroneous display of set values can be prevented.

[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]

The main control side timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
The main control side timer interrupt processing is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 18, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes power supply check/backup processing in step S901. This power supply check/backup process mainly monitors the level of power supplied from the power supply board, and if an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the power is restored so that the game can be resumed without hindrance when the power is restored. A backup process or the like of storing predetermined game information in the RAM 203 is performed.

(power supply check/backup processing)

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the power check/backup process in step S901.
In the power supply check/backup process, in step S1001, the CPU 201 reads the power failure signal output from the power supply board twice, and in the following step S1002, determines whether or not the read values match. If the two values do not match, the process returns to step S1001 and the power failure signal is read twice.

If both values match in step S1002, the CPU 201 determines in step S1003 whether or not the power failure signal is at a normal level (the power failure signal is OFF=normal level, ON=not normal level).
If the power failure signal is at the normal level (step S1003: OFF), the CPU 201 turns the backup flag OFF in step S1004, clears the power failure confirmation counter in step S1005, and ends the power failure check process in step S901. That is, when it is confirmed that the power failure signal is at a normal level, the timer interrupt processing is continued without performing the backup processing described below.

On the other hand, if the power failure signal is not at the normal level in step S1003 (step S1003: ON), the CPU 201 increments the value of the power failure confirmation counter by 1 in step S1006, and the value of the power failure confirmation counter increases in step S1007. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (threshold = a natural number equal to or greater than 2: for example, "2").
If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is not equal to or greater than the threshold, the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check process in step S901. In other words, when the power failure signal is detected to be at a non-normal level but not continuously detected, the backup process is not performed and the timer interrupt process is continued.

On the other hand, if the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is equal to or greater than the threshold, the CPU 201 performs backup processing shown as steps S1008 to S1011.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first clears the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (S1108), turns off the firing enable signal (S1009), and turns on the backup flag (S1010).
Furthermore, the CPU 201 transmits a power-off command to the effect control unit 24 (S1011), and advances the process to step S1012.

In step S1012, the CPU 201 performs processing to enable RAM protection and disable the prohibited area.
RAM protection is a function to prevent the RAM 203 from being rewritten due to malfunction or erroneous operation. By setting the RAM protection to valid, only data reading from the RAM 203 is enabled, and data writing is disabled.
Also, the prohibited area is an area corresponding to the specified area in the IAT (prohibition of traveling outside the specified area) function, and by setting the prohibited area to invalid, the IAT reset will not occur thereafter.

In step S1013 following step S1012, the CPU 201 clears the value of the output port, and in step S1014, stops timer interrupt processing, sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, and shifts to infinite loop processing.
During this infinite loop, the CPU 201 is reset by the WDT and transitions to an operation stop state due to loss of operating power.

Returning the description to FIG.
In FIG. 18, after completing the power check/backup process in step S901, the CPU 201 executes input data creation process in step S902. Specifically, input data is created based on input information (ON/OFF signals and rising states (ON edge, OFF edge)) from various sensors and switches.
The input information here is, for example, the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a. ON/OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal to be output, ON/OFF information (operation information), status signals from the payout control board 29 (ON/OFF information of the front door open sensor 61 and the full detection sensor 60), and the like. As a result, whether or not a game ball is detected in an out hole or each winning hole is monitored for each interruption.

After finishing the input data creation process of step S902, CPU201 is step S903 and performs the timer management process which manages the timer used for game motion control. Here, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the gaming machine 1 are updated (subtraction processing).

Next, the CPU 201 performs input management processing in step S904. In this input management process, based on the input data created in the input data creation process (S902), the values of the winning counter and OUT ball monitoring counter are updated. A "winning counter" is a counter that is provided corresponding to each winning hole and counts the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). The OUT ball monitoring counter is a counter for counting game balls discharged from the OUT port 49 (out balls).
The input management process in step S904 functions as input management means for managing input signals (detection signals) from various prize winning opening sensors.

In step S905 following step S904, the CPU 201 executes setting abnormality check processing.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 checks the set value error flag in step S1101. The set value error flag is a flag that is set (turned ON) by the processing of step S1103 described below when an abnormality is recognized in the set value Vd, and in this example, "5AH" means the ON state. .

In step S1101, if the set value error flag is "5AH" (ON state), the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905. That is, the fact that the setting value error flag is determined to be ON in step S1101 means that the transmission of the setting value abnormality command (the command for instructing the performance control unit 24 to perform setting error notification) has already been executed in step S1104, which will be described later. Therefore, the setting error check process ends without sending the setting value error flag again.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S1101 that the set value error flag is not "5AH" (it is OFF), the CPU 201 determines in step S1102 whether the set value Vd is within the normal range (within the range of 0 to 2). determine whether or not Specifically, the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the value is within the range of "00H" to "02H".

If the set value Vd is within the normal range, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
If the set value Vd is not within the normal range, the CPU 201 advances to step S1103 to set the set value error flag (ON state). A value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check process is finished.
Here, the setting value error flag includes step S1308 (setting error determination at the time of winning) in FIG. 22 described later, step S1501 in FIG. It is used in step S1701 in FIG. 28 (setting error determination when performing variation pattern lottery at the start of variation).

Here, upon receiving the set value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 performs processing for notifying data abnormality of the set value Ve. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an image including a message such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a member of staff."
In the gaming machine 1, a setting error (setting value error) can be canceled by performing a setting change operation.

Return the description to FIG.
After the CPU 201 completes the setting abnormality check process in step S905, the CPU 201 executes error management process in step S906. In this error management process, based on input data related to various sensors and status signals from the payout control board 29, the presence or absence of error occurrence is monitored.
When an error occurs, the CPU 201, as error processing, transmits the corresponding command to the effect control unit 24 if the error type requires transmission of an error command. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error command, it executes error notification according to the error type. Further, the CPU 201 transmits an error cancellation command to the effect control section 24 when the error during occurrence is eliminated. When the performance control unit 24 receives this error cancellation command, it terminates the error notification being executed.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 201 executes timer interrupt random number management processing for periodically updating the random numbers associated with each variation display game. Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, for the random number for special symbol judgment and the random number for auxiliary hit judgment, update the random number (add +1 for each interrupt), and Then, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. Note that the internal lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) are generated by the random number generation circuit, and are not updated here.

In step S908 following step S907, the CPU 201 executes prize ball management processing. In this winning ball management process, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command designating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29 . When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, it controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Next, CPU201 is step S909 and usually performs design management processing. In this normal symbol management process, a process necessary for executing the normal symbol variation display game is performed. Here, it monitors whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for auxiliary hit determination) necessary for the auxiliary winning lottery is generated. Acquire (random number acquisition process), hold and store the maximum number of held balls up to the upper limit with the game information as hold data (operation hold balls related to normal symbols) (hold storage process). Then, when the predetermined fluctuation display start condition regarding the normal pattern is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the operation holding ball is performed, and the selection of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern based on the auxiliary winning lottery result and the normal pattern stop display mode (normal stop symbol). Further, here, in order to perform variable display of normal symbols, LED display data for variable display is created if the pattern is in motion, and LED display data for stop display is created if the pattern is not in motion.

Furthermore, in step S910, the CPU 201 executes a normal electric accessary product management process. In this normal electric accessary product management process, a process necessary for executing the normal electric open game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a hit, a process of setting solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c, whereby the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable wing 47 is controlled.

Subsequently, CPU201 is step S911 and performs a special design management process. In this special symbol management process, a big hit lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol variation display game, and based on the result of the lottery, the special symbol variation pattern (forecast variation pattern and variation pattern at the start of variation) and the special stop symbol are determined. is determined, and other processes necessary for the special symbol variation display game are executed.
The details of the special symbol management process in step S911 will be explained again.

Next, the CPU 201 executes a special electric accessary product management process in step S912. In this special electric accessary product management process, the setting process necessary for controlling the execution of the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the execution control of the hit game (jackpot game) corresponding to the hit type is performed.
Specifically, it sets solenoid control data for the big winning hole solenoid 52c, counts the number of rounds (in the case of a big hit), and monitors the maximum number of winnings to the big winning hole 50 and the opening time. In addition, when the winning game is finished, transition setting of the game state is performed based on the game state at the time of winning and the winning type.

Also, here, a plurality of production control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the winning game. At the start of the jackpot, at the start of the round game, at the end of the round game, at the end of the maximum number of rounds, etc., the timing of sending the jackpot start command, the round start command, the round end command, the big win opening prize command, and the jackpot end command has arrived. send accordingly. The big win start command includes the current winning type information, and is used on the side of the performance control section 24 when determining a series of winning performance scenarios to be developed during the winning game. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information about the type of the hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the hit, that is, information capable of specifying the game state after the end of the hit game. It is used when deciding the production mode after the game. Therefore, since this "jackpot end command" can specify the game state after the end of the winning game, it plays a role as a game state designation command for designating the game state.

After completing the processing for game progress up to step S912, the CPU 201 performs external terminal management processing in step S913. In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the gaming machine 1 is output to external devices such as the hall computer HC and island lamps through the external centralized terminal board 21 for frame. The operating state information includes, for example, game information such as winning game occurrence information, symbol variation display game execution start information, number of wins/number of prize balls, and error information.

Next, the CPU 201 executes LED management processing in step S914. In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) for LED indicators such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the setting/performance indicator 97 is performed. A control signal based on display data created in normal symbol management processing (step S909), special symbol management processing (step S911), etc. is output to the corresponding display device or indicator in this LED management processing, and display control is performed. done. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of the special symbols in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b and the normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 39a are realized.

In step S915 following step S914, the CPU 201 saves the values of all registers, and then performs performance display monitor display processing in step S916. That is, this is a process for causing the setting/performance indicator 97 to display the value as the above-described normal time ratio information.
As mentioned above, in the case of this example, the value of the normal time ratio information is recalculated each time the number of out balls in all states reaches a predetermined specified value, and the setting/performance indicator 97 displays the current normal It is possible to display the time ratio information and the previous normal time ratio information (normal time ratio information whose calculation was completed at the most recent recalculation timing). Therefore, in the display processing of step S916 in this case, the setting/performance display unit 97 is caused to display the values of these two types of normal time ratio information.
Note that the current normal time ratio information value is a value calculated in the processing of step S604 in the main loop processing (FIG. 11) described above, and the previous normal time ratio information value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the CPU 201 reads out the stored value and causes the setting/performance display 97 to display it.

Next, the CPU 201 restores the values of all registers in step S917, clears the WDT count value in step S918, and ends the main control side timer interrupt processing.

When the above timer interrupt processing ends, the CPU 201 executes the main loop processing (S123) until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[4-3. Processing related to special symbol variation display game]
(Special design management processing)

Next, processing of the main control section 20 relating to the special symbol variation display game will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol management process (step S911) described above. As described above, the special symbol management process is executed as part of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Based on the special symbol variation pattern (previous variation pattern and variation pattern at the start of variation) and determination of special stop symbols, etc. are performed.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs a special pattern 1 starting port check process for the special pattern 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) in step S1201, and then performs special pattern 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) in step S1202. Special figure 2 start opening check processing is performed.
The details of these starting port check processes will be described again with reference to FIG. 22 .

After completing the start port check processing in steps S1201 and S1202, the CPU 201 determines the state of the condition device operation flag in step S1203. This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is ON (for example, 5AH), it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (for example, 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

If the conditional device operation flag is OFF (≠5AH), that is, if the jackpot game is not in progress, the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol operation status branch processing of step S1204, special symbol operation status according to the special symbol operation status (00H ~ 03H) Processing related to the variable display operation is performed (steps S1205, S1206, S1207).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1203 that the big hit game is in progress (=5AH), the CPU 201 does not perform the processing related to the special symbol fluctuation display operation in steps S1205 to S1207, and proceeds to the special symbol display data update process in step S1208. That is, when the big win game is being played, the variable display operation of the special symbols is not performed (the display state of the special symbols of the special symbol display device is kept as fixed display after the big win). It should be noted that the "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol.

In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S1204, depending on whether the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", "varying (02H)", or "confirming (03H)". , perform corresponding processing.

Specifically, the CPU 201 performs special symbol variation start processing (step S1205) when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", and special symbol variation when it is "varying (02H)". During symbol fluctuation processing (step S1206), when it is "confirming (03H)", during special symbol confirmation time processing (step S1207) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, and the above-mentioned "while fluctuating" means that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (fluctuation display). The above "confirming" means that the fluctuation of the special symbols is finished and the stop (confirmed) display is in progress (during the special symbol confirmation time).

It should be noted that, in the process during the special design fluctuation of step S1206, whether or not the special design is in the process of fluctuation, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special design has passed is monitored, and if the fluctuation time has passed, the effect control command As a process of transmitting a "variation stop command" to the production control unit 24, storing a fixed display time (eg 500 ms) in the special symbol role product operation timer, and switching the special symbol operation status to "confirming (03H)" (Store 03H in the special symbol operation status) processing and the like. The above-mentioned "variation stop command" is a command indicating that the special symbol variation has ended. By this variation stop command, the effect control unit 24 indicates that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the special symbol variation time has elapsed. By grasping the fact (termination), the decoration pattern currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed. As a result, when the special symbol variation display game is terminated, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated. Further, the above-mentioned "determined display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the special symbol confirmation time processing in step S1207, it is monitored whether or not the above-described fixed display time has elapsed. Switch the symbol operation status to "waiting (01H)" (store 01H in the special symbol operation status), and if the special symbol variation display game of this time is a big hit, the process required to start the big win game (stop the big win pattern) various setting processing at the time). In the various setting processes when the jackpot pattern is stopped, as the jackpot game transition preprocessing, the jackpot determination flag is cleared, the condition device operation flag is turned on, and the game state is set to the same game state as the normal state. process.
In addition, in the special symbol confirmation time process of step S1207, when the game state is updated, a process of transmitting a "game state designation command" including game state transition information to the effect control unit 24 is performed. The effect control unit 24 can grasp that the game state has shifted by the game state designation command.

By the processing of steps S1205, S1206, and S1207, the variable display operation of setting the variable start and the variable stop of the special symbol is realized.
The details of the special symbol variation start processing in step S1205 will be explained again with reference to FIG.

When one of steps S1205 to S1207 is completed, the CPU 201 executes special symbol display data update processing in step S1208. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if the special symbol is fluctuating, 7-segment display data for the special symbol fluctuating is created, and if the special symbol is not fluctuating. For example, data for 7-segment display during special symbol stop display is created. The special symbol display data created here is output to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b by the LED management process (step S914) of FIG.

The CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process of step S911 in response to executing the update process of step S1208, and proceeds to the special electric auditors product management process of step S912 shown in FIG.

(Special figure 1 starting port check process)

With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22, the special figure 1 start opening check process (step S1201) will be described.
This special figure 1 starting opening check process plays a role as winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. In the special figure 1 starting opening check process in this example, the winning of the upper starting opening 34 occurs as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side (processing at the time of winning on the special figure 1 side). Addition processing of the number of operation pending balls on the special figure 1 side due to, storage processing of various random numbers (suspension storage processing), transmission processing of pending addition command, etc. are executed.
In addition, the special figure 2 starting opening check process (step S1202) also plays a role as a prize winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition as well as the special figure 1 starting opening check process, and the special figure 2 side As pre-start processing for executing the special symbol variation display game 2 (processing at the time of winning on the special figure 2 side), addition processing of the number of operation pending balls on the special figure 2 side due to the occurrence of winning at the lower start port 35, Various random number storage processing, pending addition command transmission processing, and the like are executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 starting opening check processing and the special figure 2 starting opening check processing are substantially the same processing contents. In the following, the special figure 1 starting opening check processing will be mainly described, and the details of the special figure 2 starting opening check processing will be omitted to avoid duplication.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1301 whether or not a winning (winning ball) into the upper starting port 34 has been detected.
When the winning to the upper starting port 34 is detected, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1302 and determines whether or not the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 operation reserved balls") is 4 or more. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation retention balls is the maximum retention storage number (here, upper limit 4 pieces) or more. However, if there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S1301: N), the special figure 1 starting opening check process of step S1201 is finished without doing anything.

If the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more in step S1302, that is, the winning of the upper start port 34 is detected, but if the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more, the CPU 201 goes to step S1311 described later. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number is not 4 or more (less than 4), 1 is added to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number (step S1303), and the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the CPU 201 acquires various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball generated this time. Specifically, from various random number counters, the current values of the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special symbol, and the random number for the variation pattern are acquired, and the acquired random number is stored in the reserve storage area of the RAM 203 . This reserve storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as actuation reserve balls (hold data). Until the symbol 1 variable display operation is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are reserved and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are satisfied (in the order of winning). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of reserved memories: n=4 in this embodiment), each of which can store reserved data for the maximum number of reserved memories. It has become.

In step S1305 following step S1304, the CPU 201 selects prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: "01H").
Subsequently, CPU201 is step S1306, and determines whether "special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied. The special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is a condition that prohibits the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation reservation ball.

When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied, CPU201 advances to step S1311 without executing the prefetch decision processing (step S1309) regarding prefetch decision. In this case, the pending addition command with prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "01H") specifies prohibition of prefetching, and the prefetching judgment for this special figure 1 operation pending ball is prohibited, and as a result, prefetching notice The performance will not be executed either. In other words, it can be said that the prefetching prohibition data designates that the prefetching determination process (step S1309) is not executed.

In this example, instead of performing the pre-reading determination of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of the game state, it is determined whether or not pre-reading is prohibited based on the current game state. The reason is as follows.
In the case of a game state with 'with electric sapo' that is advantageous to right-handed hitting (time saving state, probability variable state), winning to the lower start port 35 occurs frequently, but left-handed hitting is advantageous. In the case of a game state with 'no electric support' (normal state, latent state), winning at the lower starting port 35 hardly occurs and winning at the upper starting port 34 occurs frequently. Considering that, instead of blindly performing the look-ahead judgment of special figures 1 and 2 regardless of the game state, if it is a time-saving state or a variable state with 'with electric sapo', look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is prohibited to allow the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 2 side, and if it is in the normal state or latent state of 'no electric sapo', the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the pre-reading judgment on the special figure 1 side is allowed.

In step S1306, if the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 refers to the setting value error flag (flag set in the setting abnormality check process of step S905) in step S1307, setting error in subsequent step S1308 (whether the set value error flag is ON: 5AH).
If it is a setting error, the CPU 201 determines that an abnormality (set value data abnormality) has occurred, and proceeds to step S1311 without executing the prefetch determination process (step S1309). Although the details will be described later, if an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized in the processing at the time of winning, a pending addition command including prefetching prohibition data (01H) is transmitted without making it a RAM error, and the start opening check in step S1201 will exit the process.

On the other hand, if it is not a setting error, the CPU 201 executes prefetch determination processing in step S1309. In this look-ahead determination processing, a look-ahead determination is made of the big hit lottery result executed at the start of variation. Therefore, a series of 'pre-reading winning/losing determination' to pre-read the winning lottery result, 'pre-reading pattern determination' to pre-read the pattern lottery result, and 'pre-reading variation pattern determination' to pre-read the variation pattern at the start of the fluctuation processing is included.

Specifically, in step S1309, the CPU 201 first acquires the random number value for judging a big hit stored in the RAM 203 (random number storage area for judging), and compares the random number value for judging a big hit with the "random number judging table for judging a big hit" to be described later. Based on , a win-lose lottery (at least a look-ahead win-lose judgment that determines whether it is a big hit or a loser) is performed for the current operation reserve ball, and the result (referred to as "look-ahead win-lose result") is obtained.

In the present embodiment, the set value Vd is used for win-lose determination (win-lose lottery), and a specific method of win-lose determination as the present embodiment based on such a set value Vd will be described later. Since the hit/lose determination is performed in the same way in the process (FIG. 23) at the start of the variation of the special symbols, the specific method of the hit/lose determination will be explained again when the process at the start of the variation is described.

Here, in the present embodiment, the prefetch hit/loss result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201 . This is because the look-ahead winning/losing determination result is immediately used in subsequent look-ahead pattern determination processing, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM 203 .

In addition, in step S1309, the CPU 201 creates a symbol table (not shown) corresponding to the prefetch winning/losing result (at least hit or lose) and the special symbol type (special symbols 1 and 2) as the above-described prefetch symbol determination processing. Perform the pattern lottery used. Specifically, the CPU 201 performs a symbol lottery (lottery for winning type) for the currently activated ball based on the special symbol determination random number value and the symbol table acquired in the previous step S1304, and the result (" (referred to as “look-ahead symbol result”). In the "symbol table" of the present embodiment, the determination value (winning area) for determining the symbol type is defined, and depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number belongs to, it is displayed as a stop symbol. The type of special symbol to be played is determined.
In addition, when there are a plurality of types of winnings as in this example, a winning symbol table for determining the types of winnings is provided. If there is only one type of loss, the lost symbol table is unnecessary.
Here, in this example, in response to the fact that there are a plurality of types of losses, namely, "loss 1", "loss 2", and "loss 3", a losing pattern table is used for lottery of the losing types in the symbol determination. do.
Also, in this example, there are at least four types of hits, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "variable probability 6R", and "variable probability 10R", as described above. Based on the winning symbol table, the type of special symbol corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the special symbol determination random number among these four winning types is determined.

Here, for some or all of the above-described symbol tables, a symbol table that defines different symbol selection rates according to the set value Ve may be provided. For example, regarding the jackpot symbol table, it is possible to provide tables with different selection rates of jackpot types for each of settings 1 to 6 (for example, 6 types of jackpot pattern tables corresponding to 6 stages of settings). For example, it is conceivable to determine the contents of the table so that the higher the setting, the more advantageous the ball-out performance becomes for the player. Of course, it may be a jackpot symbol table common to each setting. Further, the symbol table used in step S1309 is also used in the processing (FIG. 23) at the start of variation.

The CPU 201 does not store the look-ahead symbol result in the RAM 203 while taking it into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201 as in the case of the look-ahead winning/losing determination described above. This is because the look-ahead pattern result is immediately used in subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and need not be stored in the RAM 203 .

After finishing the above look-ahead symbol determination, the CPU 201 executes look-ahead variation pattern determination. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, the above-mentioned look-ahead pattern result (in this example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probable variation 6R", "probability variation 10R", "missing 1", "missing 2", "missing 3" represents either) Then, a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern according to the look-ahead symbol result and the variation pattern random number obtained in step S1304 are used to perform a lottery of variation patterns to determine a look-ahead variation pattern. That is, the variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) to be executed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the variation display operation is pre-read and determined.

In this example, the fluctuation pattern table is also used in the fluctuation pattern lottery performed in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23).
A specific example of the above fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern lottery process using the table will be explained again when explaining the process at the time of fluctuation start.

Note that the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination result (winning command data (EVENT)) is immediately used in the pending addition command creation process in step S1310 described below, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, the CPU 201 ends the processing of step S1309 while the result of the prefetch variation pattern determination is not stored in the RAM 203 but is stored in the register.

After executing the prefetch determination process in step S1309, the CPU 201 advances to step S1310 to create data on the lower byte side of the pending addition command according to the prefetch determination result. Specifically, the data representing the type of the look-ahead variation pattern is created as the winning command data (EVENT) on the lower byte side of the pending addition command.
As for the EVENT data, "01H" set in step S1305 is updated to a value corresponding to the prefetch variation pattern (value obtained in prefetch variation pattern determination processing) in this process.

After completing the creation process of step S1310, the CPU 201 creates data of the upper byte side of the pending addition command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls in step S1311. That is, the data representing the current number of pending balls in operation and the above-described look-ahead symbol result (special symbol type) are created as winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side of the pending addition command.
For the data of the MODE, 1 reservation of special figure 1 to 4 reservations of special figure 1, 1 reservation of special figure 2 to 4 reservations of special figure 2 are set so as to be identifiable.

In response to execution of the creation processing in step S1311, the CPU 201 performs transmission processing of the pending addition command in step S1312. That is, it creates a pending addition command containing the winning command data created in steps S1310 and S1311 as EVENT and MODE, respectively, and transmits it to the effect control section 24 .

Here, if the prefetching prohibition condition is met (Y in S1306), or if an abnormality in the set value Vd is recognized in the determination processing in the previous step S1308, the CPU 201 outputs the above-mentioned prefetching prohibition data (lower byte=01H). without updating and send a pending add command with no lookahead data.
Also, at the time of overflow (when a new prize is won when the maximum number of pending memories has been reached), a pending addition command specifying overflow is transmitted (see the processing route of Y in step S1302). ).

In addition, after the pending addition command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, it is used in the effect control unit 24 side when displaying the "prediction effect" related to the current operation pending ball. Only, it is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 201 exits the special figure 1 start opening check process of step S1301 without storing the pending addition command in the RAM 203, and then performs the special figure 2 start opening check process of step S1302.

Here, as described above, in this example, even if there is an abnormality in the data of the set value Vd at the time of winning (when the operation pending ball is generated), the pending addition command is transmitted. , is a command having prefetching prohibition data, even in the case where the prefetching notice effect based on the set value Ve or the prefetching notice effect not based on the set value Ve is configured to be able to appear, the effect related to the prefetching notice Since the control itself is prohibited, no pre-reading notice caused by the malfunction appears, and the player is not disadvantaged, so no particular problem arises. If the pre-reading forewarning effect is not prohibited, and if the high-expectation pending display appears in the pre-reading forewarning effect of the pending display system even though the set value Ve is abnormal, the subsequent RAM error processing. If the progress of the game is stopped due to (error processing caused by an abnormality in the set value), the player's expectation for winning will disappear at once, causing a great distrust of the gaming machine. However, in the case of this example, as described above, the pre-reading notice itself is prohibited, so that such a problem does not occur and the player is prevented from feeling distrustful.

(Special symbol variation start process)

Subsequently, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (step S1205), which is the process at the start of variation, will be described.
In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 is first step S1401, determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero, if the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero, proceed to the processing of step S1403, this time Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S1403 to S1412) for the special figure 2 operation holding ball to be used for fluctuation display is performed.
On the other hand, if the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is zero, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is zero in step S1402, and if the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is not zero, Proceeding to the process of step S1403, the process (steps S1403 to S1412) relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol targeting the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for this fluctuation display is performed.
By the processing of steps S1401 and S1402 above, which of the special figure 1 operation reservation ball and the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially subjected to the fluctuation display operation (which operation reservation ball is preferentially digested? ) is determined. In this embodiment, if there is a special figure 1 operation reservation ball and a special figure 2 operation reservation ball both of the operation reservation ball, the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially digested. That is, the special symbol variation display game 2 is preferentially executed over the special symbol variation display game 1. - 特許庁It should be noted that it is not limited to the above-described priority variation type, and may be configured to consume the operation pending balls in the order in which they have won.

In addition, when the number of operation pending balls of both the number of special figure 2 operation pending balls and the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is zero, it will be in the state of "no operation pending balls". This state of "no operation pending ball" is a state in which the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory, and the effect control section 24 side is notified that this state has entered, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers (customer waiting demonstration screen). Therefore, when it becomes "no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S1413, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of "no operation pending ball". .

In step S1413, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (01H)", the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status). Then, as an effect control command, a "demonstration display command" for displaying a customer waiting demo screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S1415), and the special symbol variation start process of step S1205 is finished.
After that, if it is "waiting (00H)" when the judgment processing of step S1413 is executed, the special symbol variation start processing is finished without transmitting the demonstration display command again. The reason for doing this is that if the demonstration display command is sent without any conditions when the number of pending balls in operation is zero, the transmission of the demonstration display command is repeated at a cycle of 4 ms while the number of pending balls in operation is zero. This is to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary transmissions and unnecessary increase in the control load.

Note that the effect control unit 24 does not receive any effect control command (for example, pending addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has passed since the demo display command was received. is not performed for a certain period of time (customer waiting standby state), the customer waiting demo screen is displayed.

If the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is not zero in step S1401, and if the number of special-figure 1 operation pending balls is not zero in step S1402 (while the number of special-figure 2 operation pending balls is zero, When the number is not zero), the CPU 201 performs processing (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of variation of the special symbol for the operation pending ball to be used for the current variation display.
Here, for the processing of steps S1403 to S1412 described below, if the determination in step S1401 above is 'NO', the processing for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the determination in step S1402 above If it is 'NO', it will be processed for the special figure 1 operation reservation ball, but since the method of processing is the same, unless it is particularly necessary to avoid duplication, the special symbol 1 side operation It will be explained without distinguishing whether it is a process for the reserved ball or a process for the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 2 side.

In step S1403, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation pertaining to the special symbol side used for this variable display operation -1), and in subsequent step S1404, the number of pending balls in operation after the subtraction is included. A pending subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this pending subtraction command, the performance control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining active pending balls after the current active pending ball number is digested, and shifts the pending display currently being displayed.

Next, CPU201 is step S1405, sets the special design operation verification data. This special symbol operation confirmation data is information that designates the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time. If the special symbol 2 is the fluctuation start side, "01H (special symbol 2 fluctuation start specification)" is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol operation confirmation data storage area) of the RAM 203.

Next, CPU 201 shifts the pending data stored in the pending storage area of RAM 203 in step S1406, and clears the pending 4 storage area in subsequent step S1407. In the processing of steps S1406 to S1407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (holding 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 (random number for judging a big hit, random number for judging a special symbol, and for fluctuation pattern A random number) is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage areas (reserved 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area, reserved 4 storage area) corresponding to the reserved n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are stored. area) are stored in the reserved storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S1406), and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free area (step S1407). As a result, the starting order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of operation pending balls (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation pending ball acquired at the time of winning the starting gate wins which pending memory. The pending storage of the new active pending ball is enabled as it is identified as corresponding to the area.

Next, in step S1408, the CPU 201 performs processing for transmitting a command for specifying the remaining number of fluctuations and a game state command. In this step S1408, it is determined whether or not the "electricity support number counter" that counts the remaining number of times that the power supply is present is zero. Remaining number designation command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this "variation frequency remaining specification command", the effect control unit 24 side can execute the process of grasping the remaining time saving frequency and notifying the remaining time saving frequency information.
In addition, in step S1408, a process of transmitting a game state command designating the current game state to the effect control unit 24 is also performed.

Next, the CPU 201 executes change management processing in step S1409.
In this variation management process, a jackpot lottery corresponding to the start of variation, a pattern lottery for a stop symbol, and a variation pattern lottery are performed. Further, in the variation management process, an abnormality determination of the set value Vd is performed, and when an abnormality is recognized in the data of the set value Vd, an effect control command (RAM abnormality command) for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting error ) is performed.
Details of the change management process in step S1409 will be explained again with reference to FIGS. 24 to 33. FIG.

After finishing the variation management process of step S1409, the CPU 201 stores 5AH (ON state) in the special symbol N varying flag (N=1, 2) designating that the variation display is being performed in step S1410. "Special symbol N fluctuating flag" is a flag indicating whether any of the special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH) indicates that the target special symbol is fluctuating, and indicates that the target special symbol is stopped when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H).
In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag (N=1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag (N=2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, in step S1411, the CPU 201 executes command transmission processing at the start of fluctuation. In this command transmission process, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 side of the contents of the variation pattern selected in the variation management process of step S1409, the effect control command includes variation pattern information that can specify the variation pattern content. A pattern designation command” is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.例文帳に追加
Also, in the command transmission process, based on the design lottery result in step S1409, a decorative design designation command is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. FIG. The decorative design designation command consists of 2 bytes, an upper byte (MODE) designating the special design type on the fluctuation side and a lower byte (EVENT) designating the winning type. Therefore, this decorative design specification command includes information about the special design type and winning type (design lottery result) on the fluctuation side. Since this decorative pattern designation command includes information about the winning type, the effect control unit 24 side mainly includes a combination of decorative patterns when forming a ready-to-win state (symbol types with ready-to-win patterns as constituent elements), It is used to determine the combination of decorative patterns (decorative stop patterns) that are finally stopped and displayed, and the announcement effect corresponding to the winning type in the pattern variation display game.
Furthermore, in the command transmission process, a set value command for notifying the present set value Ve to the effect control section 24 side is also transmitted. By this setting value command, the effect control section 24 side can make different types of effects appear according to the current setting value Ve, or change the appearance rate of a predetermined effect.

Then, in the following step S1412, the CPU 201 switches to the special symbol operation status "fluctuation (02H)" as the fluctuation start time setting process (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status), the random number storage area for judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern Perform processing to clear the storage area.

CPU201 ends special design fluctuation start processing of step S1205 according to having executed the fluctuation start time setting processing of step S1412. After completing the special symbol variation start process, the CPU 201 performs the special symbol display data update process (step S1208) of FIG. 21, thereby starting the special symbol variation display.

(variation management processing)

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the change management process in step S1409.
In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not there is a setting error in step S1501. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value error flag is ON (5AH).

In step S1501, when it is determined that the setting error flag is OFF and it is not a setting error, the CPU 201 executes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and then proceeds to the pattern lottery process in step S1503.
In step S1502, the big hit random number determination process selects (determines) the big hit/lost type by lottery based on the big hit determination random number (internal lottery random number), the big hit determination random number determination table, and the set value Vd. be.
Details of the jackpot random number determination process as an embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG.

If the CPU 201 determines that there is a setting error in step S1501, it skips the big hit random number determination process in step S1502 and proceeds to the pattern lottery process in step S1503.

Here, in this embodiment, when a setting error occurs (when the determination result of Y is obtained in step S1501), the big hit random number determination process is not performed unless the setting error is resolved.
As described above, a setting error can be cleared by performing a setting change operation. That is, when falling into a setting error state, by performing a setting change operation and canceling the setting error state, the state in which the big hit random number determination process is performed is restored.
Incidentally, as described above, the setting value abnormality command for performing the setting change operation is transmitted in the setting abnormality check process (FIG. 20).

In the symbol lottery process of step S1503, the CPU 201 determines the type of hit/lost (type of stop symbol) based on at least the winning/losing lottery result (big hit determination flag), the random number for special symbol determination, and the symbol table. conduct. Then, the result (special symbol determination data) is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area) of the RAM 203 . As a result, the type of winning (type of winning/losing) for the current special symbol variation display game is determined.
As with the symbol lottery process at the time of pre-reading determination, the symbol lottery can also be selected according to the set value Vd.

In step S1504 following step S1503, the CPU 201 performs the current variation display operation based on at least the symbol lottery result (the above special symbol determination data), the variation pattern random number, and the variation pattern table as the variation pattern lottery process. A lottery process is performed to determine the variation pattern at the start of variation for the ball that is held in operation.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery process in the present embodiment, a variation pattern lottery is performed using the set value Vd and the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation after subtracting the amount consumed this time).
The details of the variation pattern lottery process in this embodiment will be explained again with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.

After executing the fluctuation pattern lottery process in step S1504, the CPU 201 ends the fluctuation management process in step S1409. After that, the process proceeds to step S1410 shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, in this example, the lottery results of win-lose lottery and symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation are stored in the RAM 203. This is data that is used not only in the special symbol management process (step S911: see FIGS. 18 and 21) to which the . is.
This point is different from the prefetch determination process in which the lottery result is not stored in the RAM 203 .

Although the explanation by illustration is omitted, in the variation management process of step S1409, when the win-lose lottery result is a hit, the game state after the win game is specified as the setting process for shifting the game state. Necessary setting processing is performed (game state transition preparation processing).

(Big hit random number determination process)

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment.
Prior to the detailed description of the jackpot random number determination process in FIG. 25, the jackpot random number determination method employed in the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as a premise, in this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit can take 65,536 different values from 0 to 65,535. In the jackpot random number determination in the present embodiment, the determination reference value TH is determined within the range of possible values for such a jackpot determination random number, and based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the jackpot determination random number and the determination reference value TH, Judgment of big hit/loss is performed. As an example, in this example, when the value of the random number for judging a big hit is within the range of "0 to judgment reference value TH", the judgment result of the big hit is obtained. there is

In this embodiment, as a jackpot random number judgment, when the probability is low (normal state: hereinafter abbreviated as "low probability") and when the probability is high (variable probability state: hereinafter abbreviated as "high probability") Two types of determination are performed, that is, determination corresponding to . Therefore, as the determination reference value TH, two types of determination reference value TH1 used for determination at low probability and determination reference value TH2 used for determination at high probability are set.
As exemplified in FIG. 26, the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high probability is made larger than the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability, thereby increasing the probability of winning a big hit in the judgment at the time of high probability. ing.

In the case of this example, a different value is prepared for each set value Ve as the determination reference value TH in order to make a big hit random number determination according to the set value Ve. As a specific example, for the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability, the value (BIGLMAX1) corresponding to the setting value Ve "1", the value (BIGLMAX2) corresponding to the setting value Ve "2", and the setting value Ve "6" A value (BIGLMAX6) corresponding to is prepared, and for the judgment reference value TH2 at high accuracy, the value (BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the setting value Ve "1", the value (BIGHMAX2) corresponding to the setting value Ve "2", and A value (BIGHMAX6) corresponding to the set value Ve "6" is prepared. The judgment reference value TH1 (=842) at the time of low probability and the judgment reference value TH2 (=8429) at the time of high probability shown in FIG. are doing.
In this example, the decision reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is set to BIGLMAX1<BIGLMAX2<BIGLMAX6, and the decision reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is set to BIGHMAX1<BIGHMAX2<BIGHMAX6. The higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning.

In this example, in the actual determination process, a "lower limit of determination" (corresponding to "BIGMINI-1" described later) is also used as a threshold value for the random number value. First, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than the "determination lower limit value". When the random number value is larger than the "judgment lower limit value", a big hit judgment is performed using the above-described judgment reference value TH1 or judgment reference value TH2.
If the "lower limit of judgment" is set to "0", the condition for judging a big hit is that the random number is within the range of "0" to "the judgment reference value TH". On the other hand, if the "judgment lower limit" is set to a value (X) larger than "0", the judgment condition for a big hit is that the random number is within the range of "X" to "judgment reference value TH". Become.

Based on the above premise, the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first acquires setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table in step S1601.

FIG. 27 illustrates a random number determination table for judging a big hit used in the random number judging process, FIG. A random number determination table is illustrated.
As the jackpot random number determination process, the determination process for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A and the determination process for special figure 2 using the table shown in FIG. 27B are performed. Since it is performed similarly by the common processing shown in FIG. 25, only the determination processing for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A will be described below.

In step S1601, the setting difference information means a variable stored at the current reference address in the table shown in FIG. Since it is the top address of the table, the CPU 201 acquires the variable represented by "000H" stored at the top address as the setting difference information.
In subsequent step S1602, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting difference information is other than "000H". If the setting difference information is "000H" and a negative result is obtained in step S1602, the CPU 201 advances to step S1603 to acquire a determination reference value. That is, the variable (variable represented by "BIGMIN-1") stored at the address next to the top address in the table shown in FIG. 27A is acquired as the determination reference value. This process corresponds to the process of acquiring the "lower limit for determination" described above.
Next, in step S1604, the CPU 201 performs processing for shifting to a designated address. Specifically, a process of shifting the reference destination address described above from the current reference destination address (“4093” in FIG. 27A) to an address four ahead (“4097” in FIG. 27A) is performed.
Then, in step S1610, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value (the value of the random number for judging a big hit) is larger than the judgment reference value.
The series of processes of steps S1601->S1602->S1603->S1604->S1610 described above corresponds to the process of determining whether or not the random number value is greater than the above-described lower limit determination value.

In step S1610, if the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1611 and acquires small hit information.
Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the win information corresponding to the lower limit judgment value ("BIGMIN-1"), a variable represented by "000H, 000H, 000H" in the next address of the lower limit judgment value is stored. The variables correspond to "low-probability big hit information", "high-probability medium-big hit information", and "small hit information" in order from the left.
In step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1"), the CPU 201 stores the The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" of the winning information is acquired.
As for the hit information, "05AH" indicates "hit" and "000H" indicates "miss".

In step S1612 following step S1611, the CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the probability variation, and if it is not in the probability variation, obtains the low probability medium jackpot information in step S1613, finishes the big hit random number determination process in step S1502, and is in the probability variation If so, the high probability middle jackpot information is acquired in step S1614, and the jackpot random number determination processing in step S1502 is finished.
Here, the low-probability big hit information acquisition process in step S1613 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1") in step S1610, In step S1613, the CPU 201 acquires the leftmost "000H" of the winning information variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored in the address next to the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").
In addition, regarding the high probability middle jackpot information acquisition process of step S1614, the process of step S1614 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1") in step S1610. If so, the CPU 201 acquires the center "000H" of the winning information variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of the lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").

Through the series of processes described above, if the random number value is equal to or less than the lower limit value for determination, information about the failure is acquired.

Subsequently, when it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is greater than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 returns to step S1601 and acquires setting difference information from the random number determination table for judging a big hit.
If the process of step S1601 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is greater than the lower limit value in step S1610, the reference address described above is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. , "001H" stored in the reference destination address is obtained as the setting difference information.
Therefore, in this case, the determination result that the setting difference information is other than "000H" is obtained in subsequent step S1602, and the CPU 201 advances the process to step S1605.

The processing of steps S1605 to S1609 is processing related to acquisition of the determination reference value TH according to the set value Ve. First, a process related to the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is performed.
Specifically, in step S1605, the CPU 201 acquires the setting value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as setting value information acquisition processing, and corrects the setting value information acquired in subsequent step S1606 by 2 bytes. That is, the set value Vd, which is 1 byte in this example, is corrected to 2 bytes.
Next, in step S1607, the CPU 201 acquires a determination reference value corresponding to the setting value Ve based on the correction information, that is, the setting value Vd corrected by 2 bytes.
When step S1607 is executed for the first time after the start of the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, the reference address is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. In the process of step S1607, the judgment reference values stored in the addresses shifted by the correction information from the reference address (that is, in this case, "BIGLMAX1" at address "4098" and "BIGLMAX2" at address "4099") are stored. "Any one of 'BIGLMAX6' at address '4100'). Specifically, in this case, if the above correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "1" (set value Vd="00H"), "BIGLMAX1" at the address next to the reference destination address is acquired, If the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "2" (set value Vd="01H"), "BIGLMAX2" at the address two ahead of the reference destination address is acquired, and the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve If it corresponds to "3" (set value Vd="02H"), "BIGLMAX6" at the address three ahead of the reference destination address is acquired.

In response to obtaining the determination reference value in step S1607, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value is greater than the determination reference value in step S1610 through the processing of steps S1608→S1609 (these processing will be described later). judge. As a result, the big hit determination is performed using the determination reference value TH1 when the probability is low.

Big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is performed in step S1610, and if it is determined that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, a big hit), the above-described step S1611 and subsequent steps Processing is executed, and winning information acquisition processing is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the winning information corresponding to the case of using the low probability judgment reference value TH1, the low probability judgment reference value TH1 ("BIGLMAX1""BIGLMAX2""BIGLMAX6") is stored. A variable represented by "05AH, 05AH, 000H" is stored in the next address of the area ("4098" to "4100") (this variable is also in order from the left side "low probability middle jackpot information""high probability middle Represents big hit information” and “small hit information”).
In the process of step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH1, the CPU 201 stores the random value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. The rightmost '000H' of the hit information variables '05AH, 05AH, 000H' is obtained.
Also, in this case, if it is not during the probability change, the CPU 201 in the process of step S1613, out of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above Acquire the leftmost "05AH", and if it is during probability change, in the process of step S1614, acquire the center "05AH" among the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information.

Here, in step S1610, the big hit judgment using the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability was performed, and the random number value was larger than the judgment reference value TH1 (that is, the judgment at the time of low probability was "missing") In this case, the big hit judgment is performed using the judgment reference value TH2 (“BIGHMAX1”, “BIGHMAX2”, “BIGHMAX6”) at the time of high probability. At this time, the reference address is the address ``4097'' shown in FIG. should be shifted to the address "4103", that is, the top address of the information storage area ("4103" to "4107") for judging the big hit using the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.
If the set value Ve is in three stages, the address shift amount is six addresses from "4097" to "4103". In the information storage area for judging a big hit using the judgment reference value TH1, not only "BIGLMAX1", "BIGLMAX2" and "BIGLMAX6" but also "BIGLMAX3", "BIGLMAX4" and "BIGLMAX5" are stored. In other words, in this case, the address shift amount should be 9 addresses corresponding to the increase of 3 in the determination reference value TH1.

In this way, when the reference destination is shifted from the information storage area corresponding to the low probability in the table to the information storage area corresponding to the high probability, the shift amount of the reference destination address is the number of stages of the setting value Ve (the number of setting values Ve to be used). number). Therefore, in this example, the setting stage information is acquired in step S1608, and the process of shifting to the designated address is performed based on the setting stage information in the subsequent step S1609. Specifically, in this example, setting stage information indicating "three stages" is acquired, and the reference address is shifted forward by six addresses based on the setting stage information.

By executing the processing of steps S1608 and S1609, when it is determined that the big hit determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is performed in step S1610 and the random value is greater than the determination reference value TH1 , in the process of step S1601, the setting difference information "001H" of the address "4103" shown in FIG. 27A is obtained.
Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the setting difference information is other than "000H" in the determination processing of step S1602, and the processing after step S1605 is executed again.
Then, in the acquisition process of step S1607 in this case, the determination reference value TH2 corresponding to the set value Ve is acquired from among the determination reference values TH2 of "BIGHMAX1", "BIGHMAX2", and "BIGHMAX6", and through steps S1608 and S1609 In the determination process in step S1610 that is performed, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than the acquired determination reference value TH2. That is, the big hit determination is performed using the high probability determination reference value TH2.

In this way, in step S1610, a big hit determination is performed using the high probability determination reference value TH2, and if it is determined that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH2 (a big hit), steps after step S1611 are performed. Acquisition processing of hit information is performed by processing.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the storage area ("4104" to "4106") of the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high probability as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case of using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high probability. A variable represented by "000H, 05AH, 000H" is stored in the next address (this variable also represents "low-probability middle-big hit information", "high-probability middle-big hit information", and "minor hit information" in order from the left). .
In the process of step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the determination reference value TH2, the CPU 201 stores the random number in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. The rightmost '000H' of the hit information variables '000H, 05AH, 000H' is obtained.
Also, in this case, if it is not during the probability change, the CPU 201 in the process of step S1613, out of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above Acquire the leftmost "000H", and if it is during probability change, in the process of step S1614, acquire the central "05AH" among the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information. In other words, if the odds are not changing, the information of "lost" is acquired, and if the odds are changing, the information of "hit" is acquired.

In step S1610, a big hit judgment is performed using the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high probability, and the random number value is larger than the judgment reference value TH2 (that is, it is a miss for both the judgment reference values TH1 and TH2). In this case, in this example, processing is performed based on the information stored in the areas of addresses "4109" to "4111" in the table shown in FIG.
Here, depending on the processing of steps S1608 and S1609 executed when the high-accuracy determination reference value TH2 is acquired in step S1607, the reference address may be six addresses ahead of the previous address "4103". It will be shifted to "4109". Therefore, in the process of step S1601 executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is greater than the determination reference value TH2, "000H" stored at the address "4109" is acquired as the setting difference information. be done. That is, in this case, the processing proceeds in steps S1601→S1602→S1603.

Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, in the storage area of the information corresponding to deviation ("4109" to "4111"), "65535" is stored as the determination reference value at the next address ("4110") of the setting difference information. stored. In other words, a "defect determination reference value" for reliably determining a deviation is stored for a random number value that can be between 0 and 65535. FIG. Furthermore, variables "000H, 000H, 000H" representing deviation information are stored at the next address ("4111") of the determination reference value for deviation. The variables are also information corresponding to low probability, high probability, and small hits in order from the left.

In this case, in the acquisition process of step S1603, "65535" is acquired as the "determination criterion value for deviation" stored at the address next to the reference address as the determination criterion value. Then, in the determination processing of step S1610 that is executed through the processing of step S1604, it is determined whether or not the random number value is greater than the "determination reference value for error"=65535. A determination result is obtained that is not greater than the "determination reference value for deviation".

In this way, in step S1610, determination using the "determination reference value for deviation" is performed, and if it is determined that the random number value is not greater than the "determination reference value for deviation", the deviation information is acquired.
Specifically, in step S1611, which is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not greater than the "determination reference value for failure", the CPU 201 sets the "determination reference value for failure" in the table. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address is obtained.
Also, in this case, if it is not during the probability change, the CPU 201 changes the leftmost "000H" among the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored in the next address of the "determination reference value for failure" in the processing of step S1613. If it is acquired, and it is during probability change, in the process of step S1614, the central "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" will be acquired.
In this way, when it is determined that there is a loss with respect to both of the determination reference values TH1 and TH2, each "hit information" (small hit information, low probability middle big hit information, high probability Information representing "losing" is acquired as middle jackpot information).

(Variation pattern lottery process)

The fluctuation pattern lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504.
First, in step S1701, the CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a setting error based on the setting error flag. That is, based on the big hit determination flag, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (=5AH).

If it is determined in step S1702 that the game is not hit (lost), the CPU 201 selects a deviation variation pattern table in step S1703, and proceeds to variation pattern selection processing in step S1706. That is, it is a process of selecting a variation pattern based on the table and the random number for the variation pattern.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a hit variation pattern table in step S1704, and proceeds to variation pattern selection processing in step S1706.

FIG. 29 shows an example of a losing variation pattern table, and FIG. 30 shows an example of a winning variation pattern table.
First, as a premise, a variation pattern table for special figure 1 and a variation pattern table for special figure 2 are prepared as a losing variation pattern table and a hit variation pattern table, respectively.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of loss performed using the loss variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8s, normal fluctuation 12s, normal reach, super reach 1, super reach 2, super reach 3, and super reach 4.
Also, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning performed using the winning variation pattern table shown in FIG. There are 5 types of "Super Reach 4".
In addition, regarding "normal fluctuation", the numerical value written together represents the fluctuation time, and "s" after the numerical value means "second".

Here, among the above-described variation patterns, especially "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", and "normal variation 12s" belong to variation patterns corresponding to so-called "loss" that are not selected at the time of winning (hereinafter (It is sometimes referred to as a "loss variation pattern").

In this embodiment, the variation pattern lottery at the time of loss is performed using a different variation pattern table for each loss type (loss 1, 2, 3) regardless of special figures 1 and 2 (see FIG. 29).
Here, in the present embodiment, the selection rate (the rate at which the corresponding type is selected) by symbol lottery is different for each of the types of "losing 1", "losing 2", and "losing 3". ” has the highest selectivity, and “missing 2” and “missing 3” have lower selectivity than “missing 1”. Specifically, in this example, the selectivity of "miss 1" is "190/200", and the selectivity of "miss 2" and "miss 3" is respectively "5/200". In this case, if the big hit determination result is "loss", in most cases, "loss 1" is selected as the type of loss.

As the variation pattern lottery for the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery when the loss type is "loss 1" is not determined according to the set value Ve, but determined according to the number of retained balls. Therefore, among the variation pattern tables for special figure 1, the variation pattern table used when the loss type is "loss 1" is common between the set values Ve, but different tables for each number of retained balls are provided.

In the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 in the case of "loss 1", the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", "normal variation 12s", and "normal reach". In this example, the fluctuation pattern to be selected is changed according to the number of reserved balls.
Specifically, if the number of held balls = 0, "normal fluctuation 12s" and "normal reach", if the number of held balls = 1, "normal fluctuation 8s" and "normal reach", if the number of held balls = 2, "normal Variation 6s" and "Normal reach", and when the number of pending balls = 3, "Normal variation 4s" and "Normal reach" are the variation patterns to be selected.

Here, in the variation pattern table, the numerical values stored for each variation pattern to be selected are based on the premise that the random number for determining the variation pattern can take 200 different values from 0 to 199. Distribution of winning probability It represents a value (a value representing distribution). For example, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1, in the table of "missing 1" and "holding ball number = 0", the stored value for "normal fluctuation 12s" = "160", the stored value for "normal reach" = "40" This means that the winning probability of "normal variation 12s" is "160/200" and the winning probability of "normal reach" is "40/200".
The above distribution value is shown as the stored value of the table for the sake of convenience of explanation, and the actual fluctuation pattern table stores the judgment reference value used in the above-mentioned jackpot random number judgment. become. For example, in the above table of "missing 1" and "holding ball number = 0", for example, "159" is stored as the actual stored value (criterion value), and in that case, the random number for the variation pattern is 159 or less. If so, "normal fluctuation 12s" is selected, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is greater than 159, "normal reach" is selected.

As can be seen by referring to the distribution value shown in FIG. 29, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 1", "normal fluctuation" is more likely to be selected than "normal reach" (I try to increase the appearance rate).
In addition, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "loss 1", the larger the number of held balls, the shorter the fluctuation time normal fluctuation pattern is selected.

Subsequently, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery in each case where the type of loss is "disappear 2" and "disappear 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve, while depending on the number of pending balls I don't do lottery. For this reason, the variation pattern table for special figure 1 used in each case of "loss 2" and "loss 3" is common among the number of held balls, but different tables are prepared for each set value Ve there is

In the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "loss 2" and "loss 3", the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is 4 of "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". considered to be a seed.
In this example, for the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 3", the fluctuation pattern to be lottery is changed according to the set value Ve.
Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of special figure 1, the fluctuation patterns to be drawn for each combination of "missing 2", "missing 3" and setting 1, 2, 6 are as follows.
Setting 1 and "missing 2" = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 1 and "missing 3" = super reach 1
Setting 2 and "missing 2" = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 2 and "missing 3" = super reach 2, 3
Setting 6 and "missing 2" = super reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 6 and "missing 3" = super reach 4

From the distribution values illustrated in the figure, in this example, as a variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 2", in the case of setting 1, super reach 4, 3, 2, 1 Fluctuation in order The pattern is made easy to select, and in the case of setting 2, the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 2, 3, 4, and in the case of setting 3, the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 3, 2, 4. making it easy.
In addition, in this example, regarding the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "loss 3", the higher the setting (the larger the set value Ve), the higher the expectation of winning Super reach tends to be selected. I'm trying

It should be noted that, like the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the above case of "loss 2", the variation pattern table used for the lottery in which the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is three or more types has a plurality of values ( A value represented by “the number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates−1”) is stored. For example, in the table corresponding to the case of setting 1 and "mismatch 2" in the figure, for example, the first value = 9, the second value = 39, and the third value = 99 as the judgment reference values. In that case, if the random number for the fluctuation pattern is the first value or less, "Super Reach 1" is set, and if it is greater than the first value and is less than the second value, "Super Reach 2" is the second value. If it is larger than the value and equal to or smaller than the third value, "super reach 3" is selected, and if it is larger than the third value, "super reach 4" is selected.

Subsequently, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2, for the variation pattern lottery when the loss type is "1", unlike the case of special figure 1, the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is only "normal variation 12s" there is For this reason, among the variation pattern table for special figure 2, "miss 1" and "number of held balls = 0", "miss 1" and "number of held balls = 1", "miss 1" and "number of held balls = 2”, “missing 1”, and “number of held balls=3”, the distribution value corresponding to “normal variation 12 s” is all “200”.
In this case, since the lottery result is the same even if the number of reserved balls is different, the variation pattern table may be a common table for the number of reserved balls.

In addition, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery in the case of "missing 2" and "missing 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve as in the case of special figure 1, It will not be a lottery according to the number of pending balls. Therefore, regarding the variation pattern table for special figure 2, the variation pattern table used in each case of "loss 2" and "loss 3" is common between the number of held balls, but differs for each set value Ve A table is provided.

In the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 corresponding to the case of "loss 2" and "loss 3", the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is "normal variation 12s" and "super reach 4". , any one of these "normal fluctuation 12s" and "super reach 4" is selected.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "out 2" and "out 3" in this example, "normal variation 12s" is always selected when either setting 1 or 2 , and in the case of setting 6, "super reach 4" is selected.

Next, the winning variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning, both special figures 1 and 2 use different tables for each winning type.
In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the lottery target is set as follows for each winning type. That is, if the hit type is "normal 4R", both the special figures 1 and 2, the variation pattern for the lottery is "normal variation per", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", "super reach 4" It is said to be 5 types of ".
Also, if the hit type is "normal 6R", in the special figure 1, the variation pattern for the lottery is "normal fluctuation per", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". It is a seed, and in the special figure 2, there are four types of "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4" excluding "per normal fluctuation".
In addition, if the hit type is "variable 6R" or "variable 10R", the variation patterns for the lottery are "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4" for both special figures 1 and 2. There are 4 types.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the set value Ve is performed only for a specific winning type. Specifically, for the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of "normal 4R" and "variable 10R", and for the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2, "normal Variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of 4R, ``variable probability 6R'', and ``variable probability 10R''.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern lottery in the case of "normal 4R", in both special figures 1 and 2, the fluctuation pattern of the lottery target is changed by the set value Ve. Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery corresponding to "normal 4R" in this example, if the setting is 1, there are five types of "normal variation per" to "super reach 4", and if the setting is 2 or 6, "super Reach 1” to “Super Reach 4” are the variation patterns for the lottery.
Regarding the variation pattern lottery in the case of "normal R6", "probability variation 6R", "probability variation 10R" which is a hit type other than "normal 4R", in both special figures 1 and 2, the variation pattern for the lottery is the set value Ve It is considered immutable.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only in the case of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of special figure 1, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of these "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R".
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 30, in this example, in the variation pattern table of special figure 1, in each table of "normal 4R" and "variable probability 10R", the distribution value for "super reach 4" is set as the set value Ve increases making it bigger. As a result, the higher the current setting is, the more easily the variation pattern with the highest winning expected value is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 at the time of hitting each of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R".

In addition, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of winning the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed for "normal 4R", "probability variation 10R" and "probability variation 6R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of special figure 2, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R". In this example, in the variation pattern table of special figure 2, in all of these "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", "probability variation 10R" tables, the distribution value for "super reach 4" is increased as the set value Ve increases .

Here, as can be seen by referring to the distribution values in the figure, in this example, the distribution value for "super reach 4" is the largest in each table regardless of the winning type or the set value Ve. That is, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery when it is determined as a big hit, the variation pattern with the highest winning expectation is most likely to be selected.

Returning the description to FIG.
In the selection process of step S1706 described above, a variation pattern is selected based on the above-described loss or hit variation pattern table.
Specifically, when the losing variation pattern table is selected in response to the determination of the deviation in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the deviation type, the number of held balls, and the set value Ve from the variation pattern table. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the selected table and the random number for variation pattern. In addition, when the hit variation pattern table is selected in response to the determination of the hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table corresponding to the hit type and the set value Ve from the hit variation pattern table, and selects the selected table. A variation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for the variation pattern. In this case, it is needless to say that the special figure 1 and special figure 2 tables are selected and divided depending on whether the symbol to be processed is the special figure 1 or 2.
As can be understood from the above description, in each hit/lose variation pattern table, one or more determination reference values corresponding to the variation pattern of the lottery target (the number of variation patterns of lottery candidates - 1) are defined. , In the selection process of step S1706, the variation pattern is selected based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the table selected as described above and the value of the random number for the variation pattern.

In the above description, the variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern is divided for each set value Ve, but a common table may be used for some set values Ve.
FIG. 31 shows an example thereof.
Here, a modified example of the winning variation pattern table is shown on the premise that the set value Ve can take six values corresponding to the settings 1-6.
In the example of FIG. 31, a table corresponding to "normal 4R""variable probability 10R" for special figure 1, and a table corresponding to "normal 4R""variable probability 6R""variable probability 10R" for special figure 2 are set respectively An example is shown in which the table is divided into groups of 1 to 3 and groups of settings 4 to 6. FIG.
As in the example of FIG. 31, in performing the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve, it is not limited to dividing the table individually for each set value Ve, and common among some set values Ve table may be used.

Next, the processing when a setting error is detected at the time of variation pattern lottery will be described.
If it is determined in step S1701 of FIG. 28 that there is a setting error, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1705, selects the common variation pattern table for setting error, and executes selection processing in step S1706.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the common variation pattern table for setting errors.
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of setting error performed using the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error, for both special figures 1 and 2, the loss variation pattern is forcibly selected regardless of whether it is a hit or a loss. make it That is, in this example, one of the "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" is forcibly selected.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of the setting error in this example, a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of reserved balls for the special figure 1 side, and a specific variation pattern for the special figure 2 side regardless of the number of reserved balls Only, specifically, only "normal variation 12s" is selected.
For the special figure 1 side, a normal variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected as the number of held balls is larger.

Also in FIG. 32, for convenience of explanation, as a table structure, a structure that stores a distribution value corresponding to the case where the random number for the fluctuation pattern lottery can take a value of 0 to 199 is shown. As a table for each number (0 to 3), a structure is adopted in which at least the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is associated with the determination reference value.
Regarding the special figure 2 side, if a specific variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of balls held as in this example, there is no need to divide the table for each number of balls held (0 to 3) Needless to say.

In FIG. 28, in the selection process of step S1706, when the setting error common variation pattern table is selected in step S1705, the variation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for variation pattern. Specifically, in this example, a table corresponding to the current number of pending balls in the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error is selected, and the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value and the random number for the variation pattern stored in the selected table is determined. A variation pattern is selected based on the results of the comparison.

The CPU 201 ends the variation pattern lottery process in step S1508 in response to executing the selection process in step S1706. When the lottery process in step S1504 ends, the change management process in step S1409 shown in FIG. 24 ends, and thereafter the process proceeds to step S1410 (fluctuation flag ON process) shown in FIG.
As described above, in the command transmission process of step S1411 following step S1410, the "variation pattern designation command" representing the lottery result of the variation pattern and the "decorative design designation command" representing the design lottery result are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. be.
On the production control unit 24 side, based on these commands, a combination of decorative patterns when forming a ready-to-win state (symbol types with ready-to-win patterns as constituent elements), and a decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern). A combination of is determined, and a lottery or the like of the notice effect corresponding to the winning type is performed in the symbol variation display game.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a setting error is recognized at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure, the pattern (normal fluctuation) is forcibly removed, but at this time, the decorative pattern In order to confuse the player if the intense heat fluctuation is selected as the side fluctuation, in this example, as described above, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time such as normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s is selected. there is
In this embodiment, the effect control unit 24 side is also devised so as not to perform the advance notice effect in the event of a setting error. Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives a set value abnormality command (see step S1104 in FIG. 20) for notifying a setting error from the main control unit 20 side, the lottery for the advance notice effect is not performed. be.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error is recognized based on the setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 displays a message such as "RAM is abnormal. The occurrence of an abnormality is notified by, for example, displaying an image containing The notification is not limited to notification by image display using the liquid crystal display device 36, for example, notification by sound or LED lighting (and/or blinking), or a combination of multiple types of effect means such as images, sounds, and LEDs. It is also possible to make notification by matching.

In the above, for the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error on the special figure 1 side, the normal variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected as the number of retained balls is larger, but this is an example, for example, the retained ball It is also possible to select a normal variation pattern with a longer variation time as the number decreases.
Alternatively, as exemplified in FIG. 33, it is possible to select the same variation pattern for each number of reserved balls as in the special figure 2 side. The example of FIG. 33 shows a case where "normal variation 12s" is commonly selected for each number of held balls.
In this way, in the setting error common variation pattern table, the relationship between the number of held balls and the variation pattern to be selected can be variously considered, and is not limited to a specific relationship.
In addition, for the special figure 2 side, it is also possible to make the variation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls different like the special figure 1 side.

(Advantages of setting value related data table as an embodiment)

Here, in this example, in the random number determination table for judging a big hit shown in FIG. 27A, the area below the storage area for information corresponding to loss (“4109” to “4111”) is an empty area. Also, in this example, in the random number determination table for judging a big hit shown in FIG. 27B, the area below the storage area for information corresponding to loss (“4148” to “4150”) is an empty area. In this example, "0" is stored in these empty areas.
In these random number determination tables for judging a big hit, the area other than the empty area can be rephrased as a use data storage area in which use data used for progress control of game operations is stored. In addition, the empty area can be rephrased as an unused data storage area in which unused data that is not used for progress control of the game operation is stored.

Then, when such a random number determination table for judging a big hit is used as a first data table containing a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set value Vd, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 The ROM 202 stores the first data table and a second data table which is stored in a lower layer storage area than the first data table and which does not contain setting value related information.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a storage example of the first data table and the second data table in the ROM 202 of this embodiment.
As shown in the figure, in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, a special symbol creation address table, that is, a second data that does not include set value related information table is stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table containing a plurality of setting value related information and the setting value related information stored in the storage area on the lower layer side than the first data table The first data table contains a use data storage area storing use data used for controlling the progress of game motions, and a second data table not used for controlling the progress of game motions. and a stored unused data storage area.

If only the used data storage area is reserved in the first data table containing setting value related information, when trying to increase the number of setting values Vd to be used (the number of steps), the incremented setting value If the setting value related information related to Vd is added to the first data table, the data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer must be shifted to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table are forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
When trying to increase the number of setting values Vd to be used by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table containing setting value related information as described above, It is possible to store set value related information related to the increased set value Vd in the unused data storage area.
Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite data after the second data table, and reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described use data storage area, use data having a capacity corresponding to the number of setting values Vd that can be set in the setting change process ("3" in this example) is stored. The storage area stores unused data of a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process (in this example, "3" corresponding to set values Ve "3", "4", and "5"). It is Specifically, in this example, the capacity is not used according to "3" set values Ve, which is obtained by subtracting the number of actually used set values Ve = 3 from the number of set values Ve that can be legally set = 6. Data is stored.
As a result, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure the storage capacity of the setting value related information related to the incremented setting value Ve when the number of setting values Ve to be used is increased. .
Therefore, it is possible to prevent rewriting of data after the second data table.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, "0" is stored as unused data. It is possible to prevent the set value related information corresponding to the value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and to enhance the fairness of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 stores the first data table in a storage area below the second data table, and stores the second data table in a storage area below the first data table. It is assumed that the data table is not stored.
Specifically, in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) as the first data table is stored in the lowest layer area of the normal data area. .
Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 has "normal program area", "unused area", "normal data area", "unused area", "measurement program area", and "normal area". An unused area," a "measurement data area," and an "unused area" are defined. The "normal program area" is an area in which programs related to general games are stored. be. For example, the jackpot determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27 is stored in this "normal data area".
The "measurement program area" is an area that stores programs related to the display and measurement of performance information such as the above-mentioned normal time ratio information, and the "measurement data area" is referenced based on the program in the "measurement program area". This is an area in which a data table related to display and measurement of performance information to be displayed is stored.

As shown in FIG. 35, by storing the set value offset conversion table as the first data table in the lowest layer area of the normal data area, the first data table can be, for example, the above-mentioned "special symbol creation address table" ( 34), etc.), and the second data table is not stored in the storage area below the first data table.

When the number of set values Vd to be used is increased by storing the first and second data tables in the ROM 202 in the manner described above, the contents of the first data table located in the lowest layer of the data area in the ROM 202 , and it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the data portion on the layer side lower than the first data table.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

<5. Processing of Production Control Unit>
[5-1. Outline of processing]

Next, the processing of the effect control unit 24 will be described. First, an example of the structure of scenario data for effect control will be described.
The structure of the scenario registration information will be explained with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37A shows the structure of scenario registration information as a main scenario and sub-scenarios. This scenario registration information is set using a work area provided in the RAM 243 (for example, built-in CPU work memory) of the effect control section 24 .
In this embodiment, the scenario registration information has 64 channels of scenario channels sCH0 to sCH63. Scenarios registered in each scenario channel sCH can be executed simultaneously.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each scenario channel sCH includes the sub-scenario timer (scTm) used in the sub-scenario update process, the previous time (scPrevTm), and the sub-scenario execution line indicating the execution line of the sound/motor sub-scenario table. (scIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) indicating the execution line of the lamp sub-scenario table, main scenario timer (msTm) used for scenario update processing, main scenario execution line (mcIx) indicating the execution line of the main scenario table, There are a main scenario number (mcNo), a main scenario option (mcOpt) which is optional data that can be added to the main scenario, a user option (userFn), a waiting time (delay), and a checksum (checkSum).

When the sound output by the speaker 46, the light emission by the optical display device 45a, and the driving of the movable body role by the movable body body motor 80c are started, the standby time (delay) and the main scenario number (mcNo) are set to the scenario channel sCH0. Register to an empty scenario channel among sCH63.
The waiting time (delay) indicates the time from registration to the scenario channel sCH to the start of the scenario. Note that this waiting time (delay) is decremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41, which will be described later). When the waiting time (delay) is 0, the process corresponding to the registered data is executed.

FIG. 39 shows examples of scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as part of the main scenario table. As a scenario for each scenario number, the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is described as time data in each line of the scenario, and the sub-scenario number (scNo) and option (OPT) can be described. . That is, in the main scenario table, sub-scenarios (and optionally options) to be executed are specified as time by the main scenario timer (msTm). A scenario data end code D_SEEND or a scenario data loop code D_SELOP is written in the last line of the scenario.
Note that the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is incremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later) from the start of the main scenario.
The scenario table for each scenario number advances to the next row when the time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in a certain row has passed. Time data in each line indicates the timing at which the line ends.
For example, in the case of scenario number 2, the operation of sub-scenario number 2 is specified as the time of the timer value "1500", the operation of sub-scenario number 20 is specified as the time of the next timer value "500", and the next timer value " The operation of sub-scenario number 21 is specified as the time of 2000″. The next line is the scenario data end code D_SEEND. If the scenario data end code is D_SEEND, this scenario is deleted from the scenario registration information (work).

Next, the structure of the lamp data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37B. As the lamp data registration information, a scenario selected from the lamp sub-scenario table, that is, information indicating the performance operation (lighting pattern) by the optical display device 45a is registered. This lamp data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243 .
In this embodiment, the lamp data registration information has 16 channels of lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. A priority is set for each of the ramp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15, and the priority increases in order from ramp channel dwCH0 to dwCH15. Therefore, the scenario (ramp sub-scenario) registered in the ramp channel dwCH15 is executed with the highest priority. Also, for example, if scenarios are registered in ramp channels dwCH3 and dwCH10, the scenario registered in ramp channel dwCH10 is preferentially executed.
Ramp channel dwCH0 is mainly used for ramp effects associated with BGM (Background Music), ramp channel dwCH15 is used for error-related ramp effects, and ramp channels dwCH1 to dwCH14 are used for normal effects.

Information that can be registered in each lamp channel dwCH includes a registered lighting number (lmpNew) indicating the number of a registered lighting pattern, an execution lighting number (lmpNo) indicating the number of a lighting pattern to be executed, and a lamp sub-scenario. There is an offset (offset) that indicates an execution line, an execution time (time), and a checksum (checkSum).

FIG. 40A shows examples of lamp sub-scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as part of the lamp sub-scenario table. As the lamp sub-scenario of each number, a value of time data (time) is described in each line (row) of the scenario, and a lamp channel and a lamp number indicating various lighting patterns are described. A lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is written in the last line.

In this ramp sub-scenario table, the time data (time) of each line indicates the start time of that line after the sub-scenario started.
The main scenario timer (msTm) described above is compared with the time data in the table, and if they match, the lamp number of that line is registered in the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B. The registered lamp channel dwCH is the channel indicated on the line.
For example, assume that scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 39 is registered and sub-scenario number 2 is referenced in a certain scenario channel sCH described above. In lamp sub-scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 40A, lamp channel 5 (dwCH5) and lamp number 5 are described with time data (time)=0 on the first line. In this case, when the main scenario timer (msTm)=0, first, the information of the first line is registered as the registration lighting number (lmpNew)=5 in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information in FIG. 37B. The value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) of the scenario registration information is updated to the value of the next line (second line). This is a registration for executing the lighting pattern operation of lighting number 5 with a relatively low priority of lamp channel dwCH5.
As for the second line, the same processing is performed when the main scenario timer (msTm) reaches "500". That is, the registered lighting number (lmpNew)=6 (that is, the lighting pattern of the lighting number 6) is registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information.
If the time data (time) is the same value for two consecutive lines, the processing for each line will be started at the same time.
In the lamp drive data creation process, which will be described later, the lamp drive data is created based on the lamp data registration information thus updated.

Next, the structure of motor data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37C. Information indicating the scenario selected from the motor sub-scenario table is registered as the motor data registration information. This motor data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243 .
In this embodiment, the motor data registration information has eight channels of motor channels mCH0 to mCH7 corresponding to, for example, eight motors.
Information that can be registered in each motor channel mCH includes the execution operation number (no), registered operation number (noNew), operation count (lcnt), excitation counter (tcnt), execution step (step), and operation line, as shown in the figure. (offset), parent (source)/child (destination) attribute (attribute), parent number (retNo), return address (retAddr), loop start point (roopAddr), loop count (roopCnt), error counter (errCnt) ), current input information (currentSw), software switch information (softSw), and software count (softCnt).

FIG. 40C shows an example of motor sub-scenario number 1 as part of the motor sub-scenario table. As the motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line (row) of the scenario, and the information of motor, solenoid/user option is described. A scenario data end code D_MSEND is written in the last line.

Regarding this motor sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) reaches 0 (it is initially 0), the time data (time) value of this motor sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), so the time data value to be set is (the time data of the current line) - (the time data of the previous line).
The motor data (motors 0 to 3, 4 to 7) are constructed such that one byte per motor indicates the motor operation pattern number (motor operation table number, which will be described later). The number of the motion pattern is set to the registered motion number (noNew) and execution motion number (no) of the motor channel corresponding to the motor number.
In step S2202 in FIG. 44, which will be described later, this motor data registration information is updated, and in step S2203, motor drive data is created based on the update of the motor data registration information.

FIG. 38 shows sound data registration information. Information indicating the scenario selected from the sound sub-scenario table is registered as the sound data registration information. This sound data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243 .
In this embodiment, the sound data registration information has 16 sound channels aCH0 to aCH15.
Information that can be registered in each sound channel aCH includes volume transition amount (frzVq), volume (frzVl), transition amount change (rsv2), volume change (rsv1), phrase change (rsv0), stereo (frzSt ), loop (frzLp), phrase number hi (frzHi), and phrase number low (frzLo).

FIG. 40B shows examples of sound sub-scenario numbers 1 and 2 as part of the sound sub-scenario table. As the sound/motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line (row) of the scenario, and information of BGM, notice sound, error sound, and sound control is described. A scenario data end code D_SEEND is written in the last line.
Regarding this sound sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) reaches 0 (it is initially 0), the time data (time) value of this sound sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm), so the time data value to be set is (the time data of the current line) - (the time data of the previous line).
The BGM data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as the BGM phrase number and volume value, and is set to the sound channel aCH0 (additionally aCH1 in the case of stereo) in the sound data registration information. .
The notice sound data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information, such as the notice sound phrase number and volume value, and is set in an empty portion of the sound channels aCH2 to aCH14.
The error sound data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as the error sound phrase number and volume value, and is set in the sound channel aCH15.
The sound control data consists of channel information in the lower 6 bytes and control information in the upper 2 bytes.
In step S2033 of FIG. 41, which will be described later, reproduction output control is performed based on the scenario updating process and the updated sound data registration information.

Note that the sound sub-scenario table and the motor sub-scenario table may have an integrated table structure for each line of time.

An example of the processing of the effect control unit 24, particularly the processing of the CPU 241, which performs effect control using the scenario data structure as described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The CPU 241 starts the processing of FIG. 41 when the main body of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

First, in step S2000, the CPU 241 performs necessary initial setting processing before starting the game operation. For example, as initialization processing, interface system initialization, interrupt setting, external memory initialization, WDT initialization, starting point return processing and control initialization of movable body characters, sound source control initialization, serial output controller initialization initialization, scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler) initialization, system timer initialization, liquid crystal control initialization, etc.
Note that each scheduler refers to the above-described scenario registration information, motor data registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information, or progress of scenario control based on these. As initialization processing, a work area for storing the scenario registration information and the like is initialized.

After completing the initial setting process in step S2000, the CPU 241 executes power-on history information initial setting process in step S2001. The initial setting process is a process for retaining in the RAM 243 information necessary for displaying a later-described setting history confirmation screen Gs performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 . Although the details will be described later, predetermined history information such as change history information of the set value Ve is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (see FIG. 46).
Note that processing executed by the CPU 241 for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, including the power-on history information initial setting processing in step S2001, will be described again.

CPU241 repeats the process after step S2002 according to having performed the process of step S2001.
Especially in this embodiment, the CPU 241 executes the processing from step S2002 while monitoring the frame timing of the liquid crystal display device 36 . In this example, control based on a V blank signal, which is a synchronization signal used especially for display control, is performed.
In this embodiment, the V blank signal is generated twice during 1/30 second (33.3 ms), which is one frame period of the display image on the liquid crystal display device 36 . Since the CPU 241 counts up the V blank interrupt counter according to the V blank signal, the V blank interrupt counter is counted up every 1/60 second (16.6 ms).
Of course, each processing of the CPU 241 is performed based on a processing clock whose frequency is much higher than that of the V blank signal. Each process in FIG. 41 is performed while grasping the period from the frame start to the end according to the V blank signal. Steps S2021 to S2043 are repeated until the end of one frame period is confirmed by the value of the interrupt counter. The processing of steps S2050 to S2052 is performed when the end of one frame period is detected.

In step S2002, the CPU 241 performs clear control on the WDT circuit that the effect control section 24 has.
In subsequent step S2003, the CPU 241 checks the frame update flag. The frame update flag is a flag for managing scheduler update and the like in a frame period.
The frame update flag is turned off at the start of a certain frame of display data (because it is turned off at step S2052 described later at the end of the frame).
Therefore, at the frame start timing, the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2003 to S2004.

In step S2004, the CPU 241 updates the frame of the scenario scheduler. Specifically, this is processing for updating the waiting time (delay), main scenario timer (msTm), and sub-scenario timer (scTm) of the scenario registration information in FIG. 37A. In other words, it can be said that the processing advances the timer of the production scenario by one timing at the start of the frame.
Then, the CPU 241 turns on the frame update flag in subsequent step S2005. This is information indicating that the scenario timer has progressed in the current frame.
Also, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2006. This is information indicating that the scheduler has not been updated, that is, the scenario contents (scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information) have not been updated as the timer progresses.
Then, the process returns to step S2002. After clearing the WDT circuit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2020 because the frame update flag is ON in step S2003. Here, the WDT circuit is sequentially reset if the CPU 241 is in a normal processing state.

As described above, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed only once after the frame start timing, and the timer of the scenario registration information is updated in step S2004. A scenario for presentation progresses every 33.3 ms, which is one frame period. For example, the main scenario timer (msTm) advances every 33.3 ms. The time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row in the main scenario table of FIG. 39 corresponds to the time of the indicated value×33.3 ms. The time in one row indicated by time (time) in the sub-scenario table in FIG. 40 also corresponds to the time of the indicated value×33.3 ms.

CPU 241 branches the process at step S2020 depending on the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter has not reached "2" (that is, if it is "0" or "1"), the process proceeds to step S2021.
The V blank interrupt counter is cleared at the end of the frame in step S2051 and is incremented twice per frame. Therefore, V blank interrupt counter=0 indicates the first half period of the frame, and V blank interrupt counter=1 indicates the second half period of the frame. The V blank interrupt counter is set to 2 by the V blank signal at the end of the frame.
The CPU 241 proceeds from step S2020 to step S2021 so as to repeat steps S2021 to S2043 as many times as possible during the frame period in which the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1".

In step S2021, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on whether the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1". That is, whether the current time is the first half or the second half of a certain frame period.
At present, if the V blank interrupt counter is 0, that is, in the first half of the frame, the process advances to step S2022 to confirm a received command from the main control unit 20. FIG. That is, it confirms whether or not one or more received commands are stored in the command reception buffer. If there is no received command, the process proceeds to step S2030.
If there is one or more received commands, the CPU 241 performs command analysis processing in step S2023.

Then, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2024. It should be noted that turning off the scheduler update flag in step S2024 means that even after the scheduler update flag has been turned on in step S2031 in the current frame period, if a command is received, the scheduler update flag is turned off again. It means turn off.

An example of command analysis processing in step S2023 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG.
As described above, the CPU 241 is step S2022 in FIG. 41 and checks whether or not the effect control command supplied from the main control unit 20 is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is read by the processing in FIG.

The RAM 243 is provided with a command reception buffer for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20 in the effect control unit 24 .
First, in step S2101 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms the read pointer indicating the read address of the command reception buffer and the write pointer indicating the write address.
The light pointer is updated in response to command reception, and accordingly, the received effect control commands are stored in the address indicated by the light pointer. The read pointer is updated when reading from the command reception buffer (step S2102). Therefore, if the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, the effect control command that has not yet been read is stored in the command reception buffer. If the read pointer is not equal to the write pointer, the process advances to step S2102, and the CPU 241 loads 1-byte command data from the address indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. In this case, the read pointer is incremented for the next read (load).

Incidentally, in practice, the determination of the presence/absence of the received command in step S2022 of FIG. 41 can also be made by determining whether the read pointer=write pointer. As an actual program, if the read pointer=write pointer at the time when the command check process is first started, it is determined in step S2022 in FIG. 41 that there is no received command.

As described above, one effect control command is composed of two bytes, 1 byte as a mode and 1 byte as an event. In step S2103 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms whether the loaded 1-byte command data is a mode or an event. This confirmation is performed by the value of Bit7 of the 8 bits (Bit0 to Bit7).
If it is in the mode, the process advances to step S2104 as processing for receiving the upper data of the command, and saves the read command data in the register "command HI byte". It also clears the "command LO byte" register. Then, the process returns to step S2101.
Even after that, if the read pointer is not the write pointer, the effect control command that has not yet been read is stored in the command reception buffer. Load 1 byte of command data from address. It also increments the read pointer.
If the read command is an event, the process advances from step S2103 to step S2105 as processing for receiving lower order data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command LO byte".

By saving the mode and event command data in the "command HI byte" and "command LO byte" registers, the CPU 241 has received one command.
Therefore, in step S2106, the CPU 241 performs processing according to the received command. A specific example will be described later with reference to FIG.

The read pointer=write pointer is when the effect control command that the CPU 241 has not yet taken in does not exist in the command reception buffer. The command analysis processing as step S2023 in FIG. 41 is terminated by confirming that the read pointer=write pointer in step S2101.

An example of command handling processing in step S2106 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 43A shows basic processing as command handling processing. In response to the reception of the 2-byte effect control command, the CPU 241 first checks in step S2121 of FIG. 43A whether or not it is currently in the test mode. If it is in the test mode, in step S2122 all production scenarios are cleared, sound output is stopped, and the LED in the optical display device 45a is turned off. Then, in step S2123, the test mode is terminated.
These processes are not performed unless in the test mode.
And CPU241 will perform the process about the taken-in production|presentation control command in step S2130.

As the effect control command, for example, a special symbol variation pattern specification command, a decorative pattern specification command, a pending addition command, a game state specification command, a power supply command, a RAM clear command, a setting change command, a setting change end command, and a setting confirmation Command, setting confirmation end command, setting value command (in this example, at least at the time of startup (S808 in FIG. 17) and at the start of pattern fluctuation (S1411 in FIG. 23), the main control unit 20 transmits), error command (of various errors notification command) and so on. In step S2130, CPU 241 performs a process defined by the program in response to the received command. Here, four production control commands are shown in FIGS. 43B to 43E to illustrate specific processing.

FIG. 43B shows processing S2130a when a variation pattern designation command is taken in as command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs processing for setting a decorative design designation command waiting state in step S2131. This is because the CPU 241 controls the variable display of the pattern by sequentially receiving the variation pattern specification command and the decorative pattern specification command.

FIG. 43C shows the processing S2130b when the design designation command is taken in as the command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 first checks in step S2132 whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it has not been received, the processing ends as it is.
When the decorative pattern designation command is received, if the variation pattern designation command has already been received, the flow advances to step S2133 to first register the scenario for the operation of correcting the origin of the character product. Then, in step S2134, the symbol variation flag is set. The symbol variation flags are respectively provided corresponding to the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and each flag represents the variation state. For example, a 2-bit first special symbol variation flag FZ1, a second special symbol variation flag FZ2, and a normal symbol variation flag FZ3 are prepared, each of which indicates during variation, during stop (hit), during stop (loss). Here, with the start of fluctuation, the corresponding symbol fluctuation flag (any one of FZ1, FZ2, and FZ3) is set to a value indicating "in fluctuation".
In the case of a hit, the symbol variation flag is set to a value indicating "stopped (hit)" for a predetermined time at the end of the symbol variation, and then a value indicating "stopped (lost)" until the symbol variation starts. is set to
In step S2135, the CPU 241 performs fluctuation start processing. After that, the variation pattern specification command is deleted in step S2136 in response to the start of variation.

FIG. 43D shows processing S2130c when a power-on command is received as command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2137. For example, it clears the storage areas such as the contents of the command reception/transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers.
Then, in step S2138, an error cancellation command is transmitted, in step S2139, the role product error information is cleared, in step S2140, the role product operation is stopped, in step S2141, the scenario for turning on the power is registered, and in step S2142, the power is turned on to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. Commands are set sequentially.

FIG. 43E shows processing S2130d when a RAM clear command is received as command processing in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2143. For example, it clears the storage areas such as the contents of the command reception/transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers.
Then, in step S2144, an error cancellation command is transmitted, and in step S2145, RAM clear error setting and error notification timer setting are performed. Further, in step S2146, the information on the lottery process in the RAM 243 is cleared, and in step S2147, the information on the scenario is cleared. Then, in step S2148, a power-on initial display (RAM clear) command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is set.

An example of processing in response to command reception has been described above.
The processing of steps 2022 to S2024 in FIG. 41 as the processing in response to the above command reception is started only during the period when the V blank interrupt counter=0 in this example.

Subsequently, the CPU 241 checks the scheduler update flag in step S2030 of FIG. 41 and branches the process. Here, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed only when the scheduler update flag is off.
Then, in step S2031, the frame update flag is turned on.
Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2006 immediately after the start of the frame, steps S2031 to S2034 are performed when the process first proceeds to step S2030 in the current frame period. Also, since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024, steps S2031 to S2034 are performed even when a command is received.

In step S2032, the CPU 241 performs processing for executing the scenario scheduler. This is update processing of scenario registration information. For example, for information registered in the scenario channel sCH with a waiting time (delay) of 0, processing corresponding to the registered data is executed. That is, the process corresponding to the scenario number specified in the main scenario table is performed. The main scenario execution line (mcIx), sub-scenario execution line (scIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx), etc. are also updated.
In step S2033, the CPU 241 performs sound scheduler execution and output processing. This is a process of updating sound data registration information according to sound sub-scenarios specified in the scenario table, and a process of outputting a sound control signal based on the sound data registration information. The CPU 241 causes the sound controller of the effect control section 24 to output sound according to the progress of the current scenario.

In step S2034, the CPU 241 executes lamp scheduler execution processing.
This is a process of updating the lamp data registration information according to the lamp sub-scenario specified in the scenario table.
For example, the CPU 241 performs the following processing for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. First, compare the main scenario timer (msTm) with the time data (time) of the lamp sub-scenario table. The time data (time) of the lamp sub-scenario table indicates the time at which the line (the line indicated by the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx)) is started. Therefore, if the time of the main scenario timer is equal to or longer than the time data (time), the line is processed.
For example, first, it is determined whether or not the current line is the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described. If the line does not describe the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND, the CPU 241 acquires the lamp channel dwCH and the lamp number described in that line, and registers the lighting pattern number in the acquired lamp channel dwCH.
Also, the registered lighting number (lmpNew) and the execution lighting number (lmpNo) are set in the area corresponding to the lamp channel dwCH. That is, the lamp number obtained from the corresponding line of the lamp sub-scenario table is set as the registered lighting number (lmpNew), and "0" is set as the execution lighting number (lmpNo). Also, the value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) is incremented by one. As described above, the lamp data registration information is updated to the state in which the lamp effect operation to be executed is registered.

In step S2034, the lamp data registration information is updated as described above, but lamp driving data creation and lamp driving data output based on the updated lamp data registration information are performed in steps S2041 and S2042.

In step S2040, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter is "0", the processes of steps S2041 to S2043 are executed, and if it is "1", these processes are not executed.
In step S2041, the CPU 241 creates lamp drive data. That is, based on the information registered in each lamp channel dwCH of the lamp data registration information, the lamp driving data to be output to the drivers that actually drive various LEDs is generated.
Then, in step S2042, control is performed so that the generated lamp drive data is output to the driver.
In step S2043, the CPU 241 performs key event processing. Then, the process returns to step S2002.
The process of creating and outputting lamp drive data in steps S2041 and S2042 is started only when the V blank interrupt counter=0. That is, these processes are started only during the first half of the frame.

After the V blank interrupt counter becomes 2, that is, when the end of the frame period is detected (S2020:=2), the CPU 241 performs processing corresponding to the end of the frame after step S2050.

First, the CPU 241 executes history display processing in step S2050. This history display process is a process for displaying the above-described setting history confirmation screen Gs on the liquid crystal display device 36 . Details will be described later.

After executing the display process in step S2050, the CPU 241 clears the V-blank interrupt counter in step S2051, turns off the frame update flag in step S2052, and returns to step S2002. Then, as described above, processing for the new frame period is performed.

Together with the processing of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 executes the processing of FIG. 44 as interrupt processing, for example, every 1 ms. That is, the processing in FIG. 44 is processing executed every 1 ms regardless of the frame timing of the display data.
In FIG. 44, the CPU 241 performs WDT pulse generation processing in step S2200. The WDT circuit counts every 1 ms with this WDT pulse.
In step S2201, the CPU 241 performs motor sensor update processing. This is the process of detecting the information of the position detection sensor 82a described above.

In step S2202, the CPU 241 performs device scheduler execution processing. Specifically, the motor data registration information is updated. Also, in step S2203, output processing of motor drive data to the driver of the movable body accessory motor 80c is performed as device scheduler output processing.
That is, the CPU 241 performs motor operation control every 1 ms, which is a time interval about 1/30 of the frame period.

In subsequent step S2204, the CPU 241 performs key input processing. That is, it confirms a signal corresponding to the operation of various operation elements such as the production button 13 and the like.
The CPU 241 finishes the interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 in response to executing the process of step S2204.

The processing examples of the CPU 241 have been described so far. In the above processing examples, the CPU 241 performs various processing in accordance with the display data frame.
FIG. 45 shows various timings for each frame period of display data.
Each frame of display data is referred to as frames FR0, FR1, FR2, . . . For example, frame FR0 is displayed from time T0 to T1, and frame FR1 is displayed from time T1 to T2.
Since the value of the V blank interrupt counter is cleared at step S2051 in FIG. 41, it becomes "0" at the start of the frame and becomes "1" at the middle of the frame (time T0m, T1m, etc.) as shown in the figure. It is cleared immediately after reaching 2".

In the figure, "SL" represents the frame period, and "SLs" represents the start timing of the frame period (hereinafter referred to as "frame start timing SLs"). "CA" means the first half of the frame.

First, as a premise, drawing processing of display data (frame image data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed by the liquid crystal control section 40 based on a liquid crystal control command from the effect control section 24 (CPU 241). This drawing process is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period SL. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is performed during the time T0 to T1, which is the display period of the frame FR0.
Further, in the liquid crystal control unit 40, preloading of data used for drawing is performed. This preloading is performed in a period one frame before drawing processing as preparation for drawing. For example, preloading for drawing display data of frame FR2 is performed during time T0 to T1, which is the display period of frame FR0.
The drawing process and preload start timing are synchronized with the frame start timing SLs as shown.

On the effect control section 24 (CPU 241) side, the processing of steps S2021 to S2043 is repeatedly performed during the frame period indicated by SL.
However, the received command processing (S2022 to S2024) is executed only during the first half of the frame CA. This is because they are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.
42 and 43, the processing load is relatively heavy, and the number of processes increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the command type, it may be necessary to perform a lottery or the like for presentation. In this embodiment, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
For this reason, with respect to the command signal, for example, the command signal received during the period indicated by the dashed line from time T0m to T1m is analyzed during the period from time T1 to T1m.

The lamp data creation/output process (S2241 to S2243) is also executed only during the first half period CA of the frame. This is because these are also executed only when the V blank interrupt counter=0.

[5-2. Display setting history confirmation screen]

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a function of displaying a history of operations related to the setting value Ve (Vd) as a setting operation history. Specifically, as the setting operation history, the history related to the change of the setting value Ve and the history related to confirmation of the setting value Ve (setting confirmation process) are displayed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as one display mode of the setting operation history.
The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 under the control of the effect control unit 24. Information representing the content and the time of occurrence (in this example, date and time: date and hour and minute) is included.
For setting change, the "content" of the target event includes name information of the type of target event (that is, "setting change") and the setting value Ve after change (corresponding to the setting value Vd that has been set by the setting change process). and numerical information of the set value Ve). The setting confirmation includes name information of the type of target event (that is, "setting confirmation") and numerical information of the setting value Ve at the time of setting confirmation (that is, the setting value Ve confirmed by the user).

The setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example consists of a plurality of pages, and specifically, five pages can be displayed. In this example, 10 items of history information can be displayed on one page, and therefore, a maximum of 50 items (10×5 items) of history information can be displayed.
In this example, the page switching operation on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the cross key 16 (see FIG. 3). For example, each time one of the direction keys of the cross key 16 is pressed, the page is turned by one page.

In the setting history confirmation screen Gs, each piece of history information is assigned a display number. In this example, "1" is assigned to the latest history, and numbers are assigned in ascending order from the latest to the past.
The current page number is also displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (the maximum number of pages such as "1/5" is also displayed in the drawing).

Although not shown in FIG. 46, events to be displayed in the history in this example include various errors in addition to the above-described setting change and setting confirmation. Errors here include various errors other than set value errors, such as door opening errors, supply shortage errors, ball clogging errors, and the like.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed in response to a predetermined operation being performed under a predetermined state. Specifically, the setting history confirmation screen Gs in this example is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 13 during setting confirmation (during execution of setting confirmation processing in step S109). Here, as can be understood from the above description, the setting confirmation process is executed in response to the opening of the front frame 2 and the operation of the setting key when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up. It is assumed that the confirmation screen Gs is displayed in such a state that the front frame 2 is open at the time of activation.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a setting confirmation screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 during setting confirmation. The setting confirmation screen is started to be displayed when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives a setting confirmation command (see S704) from the main control unit 20 side.
In the setting confirmation screen of this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed together with information for notifying the user such as the hall staff that the setting confirmation is in progress (in the figure, the characters "setting confirmation"). Guidance information (in the figure, the text of "list of setting history", the icon of the effect button 13 and the text of "determine by" correspond) is displayed.

Here, in this example, as described above, an operation guidance for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen, that is, the notification screen during setting confirmation. When a predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 13 in this example) is performed, the setting history confirmation screen Gs shown in FIG. 46 is displayed.
In other words, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives an instruction to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs in a state in which the operation guidance is displayed on the notification screen during setting confirmation.
As a result, the user can grasp two pieces of information, ie, the timing at which the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed and the operation required to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs, only by the process of displaying the setting confirmation screen. can. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load in presenting information that needs to be notified to the user when displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

Further, the setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example can be changed to all pages regardless of the number of saved history information. For example, even if the number of stored history information is "8" as shown in FIG. 46, all pages from the second page to the fifth page can be displayed according to the page switching operation. In other words, it is possible to display all pages, including blank pages that do not have history information.
This allows the user to intuitively grasp the maximum number of histories that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can hold and display.

FIG. 48 shows an example of history display information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
This history display information is information constructed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 accumulating history information corresponding to each occurrence of a target event for history display in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 .

In the work area of the RAM 243, an area for storing history display information (hereinafter referred to as "history storage area") is defined, and the CPU 241 executes the processing described later (see FIGS. 52 and 53). Then, each time the target event occurs, the corresponding history information is added to the history storage area.
Hereinafter, history information that is added one by one each time a target event occurs is referred to as "individual history information". In this example, since a maximum of 50 histories can be displayed, the history storage area in the RAM 243 is set as an area capable of storing 50 pieces of individual history information from history 0 to history 49. .

As individual history information, as shown in the figure, the "year", "month", "hour", and "minute" information required to display the date and time information of the history and the type of history (setting change, setting confirmation, or error) are displayed. It contains "type" information and "data" information. The "data" information stores the setting value Ve after the setting change and the setting value Ve after the setting confirmation when the "type" is setting change or setting confirmation. is "error", information indicating the error type is stored.

As the history display information, for example, a checksum area and a storage area for the latest history position information are provided in the top area, and the area following these areas is used as a storage area for the individual history information.
The checksum area is an area for storing a sum value calculated from information stored in the entire storage area for individual history information. The role of this sum value will be described later.
The latest history position information is information representing the storage position of the last added individual history information on the RAM 243 .

Here, since the RAM 243 has a relatively high information reading speed, it is desirable to use the history display information held in the work area as described above in order to quickly display the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
However, the RAM 243 is not connected to a backup power source, and cannot retain stored information when the power is cut off. The setting operation history displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is expected to be a history over a relatively long period of time, such as several weeks or a month. If it is used as a storage destination memory, the history information will be lost every time the power is cut off, and the history will not be able to be properly displayed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the memory 244 shown in FIG. The history display information stored in the work area of the RAM 243 is backed up.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information as an embodiment.
In this example, the memory 244 is provided with a plurality of areas as areas for backing up the history display information. Specifically, two areas, a first history saving area and a second history saving area, are set in the figure.
The CPU 241 copies the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 to each of these first and second history storage areas in the memory 244 .

As described above, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed during setting confirmation (that is, immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on again). After Since the history display information in the RAM 243 is cleared (becomes unretainable) when the power is turned off, the CPU 241 displays the history backed up in the first history storage area or the second history storage area of the memory 244 when the CPU 241 is started. information is written back to the history storage area of the RAM 243 . As a result, a state in which appropriate history display information is stored in the RAM 243 can be obtained before the setting history confirmation screen Gs is to be displayed.
Then, the CPU 241 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs based on the history display information stored in the RAM 243 .
As a result, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of properly and promptly displaying the setting operation history.

In this example, on the premise that the history display information in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244, a plurality of history storage areas such as the first and second history storage areas are provided, and a plurality of backups are taken. and
By making a plurality of backups of the history display information in this way, it is possible to improve the display resistance of the setting history confirmation screen Gs against corruption of data stored in the memory 244 . That is, even if data corruption occurs in a certain history storage area, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed using history display information in other history storage areas. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which proper history information display becomes impossible due to this.

Here, in this example, copying (backing up) of the history display information to the memory 244 is executed each time new history information (individual history information) is added to the history display information in the RAM 243 . That is, when new individual history information is added to the history display information of the RAM 243 in response to the occurrence of the target event, the history display information after the addition is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244. Copy each.

For example, it is conceivable that the history display information is copied to the memory 244 at regular time intervals. If this occurs, the power will be cut off without the latest history being reflected in the history display information in the memory 244, and when the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed at the next startup, the latest history will not be displayed. obtain.
On the other hand, if a copy is made each time the history is added as described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the stored contents of the history are inconsistent between the RAM 243 and the memory 244 due to an unexpected power failure. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of display problems of history information.

Note that copying to the memory 244 each time individual history information is added is merely an example, and copying can be performed at other timings, such as copying each time the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. be.

FIG. 50 shows an example of processing for adding individual history information to history display information.
In this example, the storage area of the individual history information in the RAM 243 is a ring buffer area capable of holding 50 pieces of individual history information.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, in a state where 50 pieces of history t0 to history t49 are stored as individual history information, new individual history information as history t50 should be added. Suppose
In this state, the latest history position indicated by the latest history position information is the storage position of the individual history information as the history t49 as shown in the drawing.

When adding the individual history information as the history t50, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, the CPU 241 updates the latest history position to the next position, that is, the storage position of the history t0. Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the individual history information of the history t50 to be added is stored in the individual history information storage position indicated by the latest history position (that is, the history t0 is overwritten).
As a result, when new individual history information is added while the maximum number of individual history information is retained, the oldest individual history information is overwritten with the latest individual history information. The individual history information storage area holds 50 items of individual history information from the latest to the past. In other words, the number of pieces of individual history information to be held does not exceed the upper limit of 50 pieces (required for display).

In this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed based on the history display information in which the individual history information is stored in the form of the ring buffer.
When the individual history information is stored in the form of a ring buffer, the latest history position is managed, and the newest order or the oldest order of each history information is automatically grasped by the storage position of each history information based on the latest history position. will be Therefore, when the history list is displayed in new order or old order as the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is not necessary to specify the new order or old order of each history information by referring to the time information included in each history information. . In other words, it is possible to reduce the processing load in displaying the history as a list in order of newest or oldest.

Here, in this example, the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is executed only on the condition that the setting is being checked. Do not display the screen Gs.
Since the setting value Ve may be changed during the setting change, displaying the history of the setting change while the setting is being changed may confuse the user, which is undesirable.
By not displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs during the setting change, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the history display of the setting value Ve.

Next, processing for realizing the operation related to the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG.
FIG. 51 is a flow chart of the power-on history information initial setting process (S2001). The process is a process executed by the CPU 241 as part of the effect control main process described in FIG. The process of S2001 is executed. As described above, the process of step S2001 is a process for holding in the RAM 243 information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In FIG. 51, in step S2301, the CPU 241 performs processing for transferring history display information in the first history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work (RAM 243). Here, if an event subject to history display has occurred at a stage prior to this activation, the memory 244 is subjected to history information update processing in step S2160, which will be described later (FIG. 53: Especially in step S2406), history display information is stored in each of the first and second history storage areas. In the process of step S2301, among the history display information stored in the memory 244, the history display information in the first history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area.

In subsequent step S2302, the CPU 241 determines whether there is an abnormality in the sum value of the first history storage area (checksum processing). That is, for the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 from the first history storage area as described above (hereinafter referred to as "first history display information"), the storage value of the entire individual history information storage area and determines whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the first history display information.
The sum value in the checksum area is calculated from the stored value in the individual history information storage area by the process of step S2405 in the history information update process (FIG. 53) of step S2160 when backing up the history display information to the memory 244. Therefore, by judging match/mismatch of the sum values in the checksum processing in step S2302, it is possible to judge whether the stored values in the entire storage area of the individual history information match/mismatch with those at the time of backup. is. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the backed up history information (for example, whether there has been unauthorized rewriting or the like).

If it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values match, that is, that the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initialization processing in step S2001. That is, if the history information backed up in the first history storage area of the memory 244 is normal, the state in which the history information in the first history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues. That is, the history display process (FIG. 54) of step 2050, which will be described later, is executed based on the history information in the first history storage area held in the RAM 243 in this way.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values do not match, that is, that the sum value is abnormal, the CPU 241 performs processing to transfer the history display information in the second history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work in step S2303. . That is, the history display information in the second history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area (that is, the history display information in the first history storage area stored in step S2301 is overwritten).

Next, in step S2304, the CPU 241 determines whether there is an abnormality in the sum value for the second history storage area. In other words, for the history display information in the second history storage area stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 as described above (hereinafter referred to as “second history display information”), the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information and determines whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the second history display information. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the history information backed up in the second history storage area.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values match, that is, that the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initial setting processing in step S2001. That is, if the history information in the second history storage area stored in the RAM 243 is normal, the state in which the history information in the second history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues. history display processing (FIG. 54) is executed based on the history information.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values do not match, that is, that the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 advances to step S2305 to clear the history display information, and finishes the initialization processing in step S2001. In the clearing process of step S2305, along with the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243, the history display information stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244 are also cleared.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing processing for updating history information in response to the occurrence of an event targeted for history display.
The target events in this example are setting change, setting confirmation, and error occurrence, and the CPU 241 updates history information according to the occurrence of these events based on the effect control command from the main control unit 20 side. is set to run. Specifically, regarding setting change and setting confirmation, the history information is updated according to reception of a setting change end command, a setting value command, and a setting confirming command from the main control unit 20 side (see FIG. 52A). As for errors, the history information is updated (see FIG. 52B) according to the reception of various error commands from the main control unit 20 side.
In this example, each process of FIGS. 52A and 52B is executed as one of the command processes (see FIG. 43) of step S2130 described above.

FIG. 52A shows setting-related command processing S2130e corresponding to setting-related commands, which are commands related to setting change and setting confirmation.
First, the CPU 241 confirms whether any one of the setting confirmation in-progress command, the setting confirmation end command, the setting change command, the setting change in-progress command, and the setting change end command is received by the processing of steps S2150 to S2154.
Specifically, in step S2150, it is determined whether or not a setting-confirming command has been received, and if the setting-confirming command has not been received, in step S2151, it is determined whether or not a setting-confirmation end command has been received. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2152 whether or not the setting change command has been received. determine whether If the setting change in progress command has not been received, it is determined in step S2154 whether or not the setting change end command has been received.

Here, regarding step S2150, the setting confirmation command includes the notification information of the setting value Ve as described with reference to FIG. It is determined whether or not a command including any of notification information of 1 to 6 has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying the set value Ve within the usable range Re, not within the usable range Ru, has been received as the setting confirmation command.
Also, in this example, the setting change time command in step S2152 similarly includes a command for notifying any of the set values Ve (“1” to “6”) within the usable range Re but not within the usable range Ru. Determine whether or not it has been received.
The significance of permitting a command notifying a value not within the usable range Ru but within the usable range Re as to the command notifying the set value Ve in this way will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2150 that the setting confirmation end command (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes setting confirmation scenario registration processing in step S2155, and proceeds to step S2159.
Also, if it is determined in step S2151 that the setting confirmation end command has been received, the CPU 241 executes setting confirmation end scenario registration processing in step S2156, proceeds to step S2159, and in step S2152 changes the setting change time command (setting value "1"). to "6") is received, the process proceeds directly to step S2159.
Further, when it is determined in step S2153 that a setting change in progress command has been received, the CPU 241 executes setting change start scenario registration processing in step S2157, proceeds to step S2159, and determines in step S2154 that a setting change end command has been received. If so, setting change end scenario registration processing is executed in step S2158, and the flow advances to step S2159.
By executing the scenario registration processing in steps S2155, S2156, S2157, and S2158, effect operations corresponding to setting confirmation, setting confirmation end, setting change start, and setting change end are executed.

In step S2159, the CPU 241 determines whether or not a specification designation/setting information command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not either the specification designation command or the set value command has been received. Although not illustrated, the specification designation command is information representing the specifications of the gaming machine 1 transmitted by the CPU 201 of the main control unit 20 at startup (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot or the number of stages of the set value Ve to be used). information to be displayed, etc.). The set value command is a command sent by the CPU 201 in step S808 (FIG. 17) in the main loop pre-processing.
Both the specification designation command and the setting value command have the upper byte of a specific value representing the specification information of the gaming machine 1. In step S2159, it is determined whether or not a command having the upper byte of the specific value has been received. determines whether or not either the spec specification command or the set value command has been received.

If neither the specification designation command nor the setting value command has been received and it is determined in step S2159 that the specification designation/setting information command has not been received, the CPU 241 ends the setting-related command processing of step S2130e. That is, in this case, the process of storing the set values in the RAM 243 in step S2163, which will be described later, is not executed.

On the other hand, when determining that the specification designation/setting information command has been received, the CPU 241 stores the specification information in the RAM 243 . That is, the upper byte value of the received specification designation command or setting value command is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243 .

In step S2161 following step S2160, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the setting is undefined. That is, it is determined whether or not the received spec designation/setting information command is a spec designation command instead of a setting value command. Here, in this example, the lower byte of the spec specification command is "0FH", and the lower byte of the setting value command is a value corresponding to the setting value Ve. Therefore, in step S2161, it is determined whether the spec designation/setting information command is a spec designation command rather than a setting value command, depending on whether the lower byte of the received spec designation/setting information command is "0FH". (Whether or not the setting is undefined) is determined.

When determining that the lower byte is not "0FH" and that the setting is not undefined (that is, the setting value command), the CPU 241 advances to step S2162 to determine whether the setting information is within the usable range Re. That is, it determines whether the value indicated by the identification data (see FIG. 16) of the setting value Ve included in the received setting value command is within the range of "00" to "05" corresponding to the usable range Re. judge.
When determining that the value indicated by the identification data is within the usable range Re and the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value information in the RAM 243 in step S2163. That is, the identification data is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of RAM 243 .
After executing the storage process in step S2163, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2162 that the setting information is not within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 skips the storage processing in step S2163 and advances the processing to step S2164.
If it is determined in step S2161 that the setting is undefined (that is, the command is a specification designation command), the CPU 241 skips the determination processing in step S2162 and the storage processing in S2163 and advances the processing to step S2164.

Note that the determination processing in step S2162 functions as an abnormality determination processing for the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side. However, the significance of determining whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re rather than the actual usable range Ru as abnormality determination of the set value Ve on the side of the effect control unit 24 will be described later.

In step S2164, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is time to change or confirm settings. This determination is made, for example, if the command determined to have been received in the current setting value related command processing (S2130e) is the first "setting value command" after receiving the "setting change end command" or the "setting checking command". It can be performed as a determination of whether or not it was.

If it is time to change or confirm settings, the CPU 241 advances to step S2165 to set the history type. That is, the above-described "type" value and "data" value are set for the individual history information to be newly added. Specifically, at the time of setting change, the value representing "setting change" is set as the value of "type", and the value representing the current set value Ve (the set value Ve that has been set) is set as the value of "data". set. Also, if it is the time of setting confirmation, the value indicating "setting confirmation" as the value of "type" is set as the value of "data", and the confirmed setting value Ve (the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command) is set. set respectively.

In response to execution of the set processing in step S2165, the CPU 241 executes history information update processing in step S2166.
Note that the history information update process in step S2166 will be described again.

In step S2167 following step S2166, the CPU 241 executes processing for transmitting the set value information to the liquid crystal side. That is, a process of transmitting information representing the set value Ve notified by the set value command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is performed. As a result, the setting value Ve notified by the setting value command, such as the setting value Ve set in the setting change process, can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .
After executing the transmission process of step S2167, the CPU 241 ends the process of step S2130e.

FIG. 52B shows the processing S2130f corresponding to the error command.
First, the CPU 241 executes error notification in step S2170. That is, the notification processing (notification processing using a predetermined effect means) is executed according to the error type specified from the received error command.

Next, as history type setting processing in step S2171, the CPU 241 sets the value of "type" to a value representing "error" and the value of "data" to an error number (a value representing an error type) for the individual history information to be newly added. ) respectively, the history information update process of step S2166 is executed, and then the process of step S2130f ends.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of history information update processing in step S2166. The updating process is a process of updating the history display information in the RAM 243 so that the individual history information is added according to the target event that has newly occurred.
First, in step S2401, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the latest history position information is within a specified range (that is, whether or not it is within a range of 0 to 49 in this example). If the latest history location information is not within the specified range (that is, if it is 50 or more), the CPU 241 ends the updating process in step S2160. That is, in this case, since there is an abnormality in the latest history position information, the history display information is not updated.

If the latest history position information is a value within the specified range, the CPU 241 advances to step S2402 to update the latest history position information to the value of the next position. The update of the value of the latest history position information here is performed within the range of 0 to 49, and as understood from the description of FIG. is set to "0" (that is, the value is cyclically incremented within the range of 0 to 49).

Next, in step S2403, the CPU 241 acquires the time information (year, month, day, hour, minute) of the RTC function unit, and in step S2404, performs processing for saving the history information in the area indicated by the latest history position information. That is, the individual history information including the acquired time information and the "type" and "data" information set in the corresponding processing of steps S2165 and S2171 described in FIG. stored in the storage area of

As the individual history information, it is also possible to store (display) the power-on time from the power-on instead of the time information by the RTC. As a result, in a gaming machine that does not have an RTC function unit, it is possible to display information that can specify the occurrence time of the target event as history information.

In step S2405 following step S2404, the CPU 241 calculates the sum value of the history information of the internal work and saves it in the checksum area. That is, for the history display information in the RAM 243, the sum value is calculated from the stored values of the entire individual history information storage area including the individual history information newly added in step S2404, and the sum value is used as the history display information. stored in the checksum area in

Further, in subsequent step S2406, the CPU 241 performs processing to transfer the internal work history display information to the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, and finishes the update processing in step S2160.
As a result, new individual history information is added, and history display information including a sum value reflecting the addition of the individual history information is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, respectively.

Here, as can be understood from the above description, in this example, when the history information stored in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244, a sum value is calculated from the history information stored in the RAM 243, and the sum value is calculated. The history information stored in the RAM 243 is stored in the memory 244 .
As a method of calculating a sum value for determining abnormality of backup information and storing it in the memory 244, first, only the history information stored in the RAM 243 is copied to the memory 244, and then the copy is stored in the memory 244. It is also conceivable to calculate a sum value from the history information obtained and store the sum value in the memory 244 . However, in that case, if the copy of the history information from the RAM 243 to the memory 244 partially fails, the sum value itself becomes a correct value. In reality, inaccurate history information is backed up, and there is a risk of inducing a display failure of the history information.
With the above method of copying the history information and the sum value, if the copying of the history information to the memory 244 fails, the checksum process will determine that the history information is abnormal. Since the history information stored in 244 can be prevented from being used for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent incorrect history information from being displayed.

Next, processing for displaying history information based on history display information held in the RAM 243 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart of history display processing (S2050). As can be understood from the previous description of FIG. 41, this history display process is executed once per frame period in this example.

In FIG. 54, in step S2501, the CPU 241 determines whether setting confirmation is in progress. Whether or not the setting confirmation is in progress can be determined by whether or not the above-described setting confirmation command is received.
If the setting confirmation is not being performed, the CPU 241 finishes the history display process of step S2050. As described above, in this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed only during setting confirmation.

On the other hand, if the setting is being checked, the CPU 241 checks the history display flag in step S2502. This history display flag is an identifier (initial value is OFF) that is set to ON in step S2504, which will be described later. ON indicates that the history is being displayed, and OFF indicates that the history is not being displayed.
At the stage where the display start condition of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is not met, the history display flag is off, so the CPU 241 advances the process from step S2502 to step S2503.

In step S2503, the CPU 241 determines whether or not a display instruction operation has been performed. As described above, in this example, the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the effect button 13, and the CPU 241 determines whether the effect button 13 is operated or not in step S2503.

As can be understood from the description of steps S2501 to S2503 so far, the CPU 241 accepts a display instruction operation for the setting history confirmation screen Gs on condition that setting confirmation is in progress.

In step S2503, if there is no display instruction operation, the CPU 241 ends the history display processing in step S2050.
On the other hand, if there is a display instruction operation, the CPU 241 sets (turns on) the history display flag in step S2504, and sets the display page identifier P to "0" in the following step S2505. The display page identifier P is a value for identifying the display page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In response to executing the processing of step S2505, the CPU 241 executes history information screen creation processing in step S2508. Then, the history display process in step S2050 ends.
The history information screen creation process in step S2508 is a process for transmitting information necessary for screen display of the page indicated by the display page identifier P to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. That is, when step S2508 is executed following step S2505, information necessary for screen display of the first page (P=0) is transmitted.
Details of the history information screen creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the history display flag is ON (that is, the state after the first page has already been displayed), the CPU 241 advances to step S2506 to determine whether or not there is a page switching operation. judge. In other words, in this example, it is determined whether or not any direction instruction key of the cross key 16 has been operated.
If there is a page switching operation, the CPU 241 advances to the history information screen creation process in step S2508.

Here, the history information screen creation processing in step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In FIG. 55, first, in step S2601, the CPU 241 calculates the head position Idx of history display. That is, the position (position on the RAM 243) of the storage area of the individual history information to be displayed at the head position of the page to be displayed from now on is calculated as the head position Idx. Specifically, the leading position Idx is calculated by “latest history position−P×α” (where α is the number of individual history information displayed per page: “10” in this example). For example, when displaying the first page (P=0), the head position Idx is obtained as "latest history position" from "latest history position-0×α". Alternatively, when displaying the third page (P=2), the head position Idx is obtained as "latest history position-2α".

In step S2602 following step S2601, the CPU 241 sends a page number as a command. That is, the information of the page number specified by the page identifier P (that is, the page number of the page to be displayed) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control section 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the display number to "1" in step S2603, and performs processing in steps S2604 to S2610 to display information necessary for screen display of the page to be displayed (specifically, individual history information and its display number). is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40 .
First, in step S2604 following step S2603, the CPU 241 refers to the history information of the area indicated by the start position Idx. That is, the stored information in the area indicated by the leading position Idx in the history storage area (information for history display) of the RAM 243 is referred to.

Next, in step S2605, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is history information, that is, whether or not individual history information is stored in the area indicated by the leading position Idx.
If it is determined that individual history information is stored and there is history information, the CPU 241 executes command transmission processing for the display number in step S2606, and then executes command transmission processing for history information in step S2607. That is, the individual history information acquired from the area indicated by the display number and the start position Idx is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

In step S2608 following step S2607, the CPU 241 updates the head position Idx to a value corresponding to the storage area of the previous individual history information (Idx←Idx−1). This update process is executed so that the value of the start position Idx is cyclically updated within the range of 0 to 49 (that is, when the start position Idx is "0", it is updated to "49").

Further, in subsequent step S2609, the CPU 241 increments the display number by 1, and in step S2610 determines whether or not transmission processing for one page (transmission of individual history information and display number) has ended. This determination can be realized, for example, by determining whether or not the display number value is equal to or greater than α.

If the transmission process for one page has not ended, the CPU 241 executes the processes of steps S2604 to S2610 again. As a result, when one page of individual history information is stored, the process of transmitting the individual history information and its display number is repeated until the transmission process of one page is completed. If the stored individual history information is less than one page, transmission of the individual history information and its display number are performed only for the stored individual history information (see S2605).

Even if the individual history information is not stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx (that is, even if the stored value is "0"), the individual history information with "0" is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side as it is. It can also be sent by command. In this case, on the side of the liquid crystal control unit 40, for individual history information for which such a liquid crystal control command with "0" is received, a display indicating no history (for example, "- ---" display) is performed.
According to this method, the determination processing in step S2605 can be omitted.

Further, when transmitting the individual history information to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S2607, after determining whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is history information on setting changes (setting change history information), In the case of the setting change history information, it is also possible to check the abnormality of the set value Ve included in the history information. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re (whether or not it is outside the range of "0" to "5").
If the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re and it is determined that there is an abnormality in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is instructed to display an abnormality. Send. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information is found to be abnormal (for example, displaying an "E" mark indicating an error). That is, it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.
Alternatively, if an abnormality is found in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the information on the set value Ve included in the individual history information may not be transmitted. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, the setting value Ve of the individual history information in which the setting value Ve is found to be abnormal can be prevented from being displayed, and the fact that the setting change history is not normal can be notified.

When the CPU 241 determines in step S2610 that the transmission process for one page has ended, it ends the history information screen creation process in step S2508.
It should be noted that when the transmission process for one page is completed, a liquid crystal control command to that effect can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control section 40 side.

Here, in response to receiving the various liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the above processing, the liquid crystal control unit 40 displays one page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the mode as illustrated in FIG. The image display operation by the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled so that screen display is performed.

The description returns to FIG.
If the CPU 241 determines in step S2506 that the page switching operation has not been performed, it determines in step S2509 whether or not there is an end instruction operation, that is, whether or not there is an instruction to end the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs. In this example, the end instruction operation is the operation of the effect button 13, so the CPU 241 determines whether the effect button 13 is operated or not in step S2509.

When determining that the effect button 13 has not been operated and the end instruction operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 finishes the history display process of step S2050. As described above, the history display process in step S2050 is performed once per frame period, and the processes after step S2501 are performed again in the next frame period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that the end instruction operation has been performed, the CPU 241 clears (turns off) the history display flag in step S2510, sets the demo screen display command in step S2511, and then displays the history in step S2050. Finish the display process.
Note that the process of step S2511 is the process of setting the liquid crystal control command for instructing the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display the demo screen for waiting for customers as described above in the command buffer.

Here, according to the above process, if there is no individual history information for a certain page, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is only notified of the page number (S2602), and the individual history information and its display number are notified. is not sent.
When the page number is transmitted but the individual history information and the display number are not transmitted, the liquid crystal control unit 40 displays the page number information of the page and each display number as the screen of the corresponding page. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays a screen indicating that there is no individual history information (for example, the notation of "----" in FIG. 38).
As a result, it is possible to display all pages including so-called empty pages that do not have history information. That is, regardless of the number of saved history information, transition to all pages is possible.

Note that it is possible not to display pages that do not have individual history information at all. In this case, the CPU 241 determines in step S2605 (FIG. 55) that there is no history information when the display number is 1, so that the liquid crystal control unit 40 does not display the current display page P. All you have to do is give instructions.

As can be understood from the processing of FIGS. 54 and 55, in this example, when the individual history information to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, it is assumed that the individual history information is individually transmitted one by one. there is
Thereby, individual history information can be transmitted by a command.
Therefore, program design on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side can be facilitated.

In the above example, the history information of the corresponding page is sent each time the page is switched. A page switching command may be transmitted to the side to instruct switching of the display page.

[5-3. Regarding the data type of the setting value in the embodiment]

Here, in the RAM 243 of the effect control unit 24, an area for storing the setting value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command or the setting value command from the main control unit 20 (hereinafter referred to as "notified setting value storage area A1") ) and a storage area (hereinafter referred to as “history set value storage area A2”) for setting values Ve constituting part of the individual history information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs. .
And in this embodiment, in the operation program of the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, the program variable of the setting value Ve stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 (hereinafter referred to as "notification setting value Pv1") and the history setting value The type (data type) of the program variable (hereinafter referred to as "history set value Pv2") of the set value Ve stored in the storage area A2 is the same. Specifically, in this example, by setting the type of the notification set value Pv1 and the history set value Pv2 to be the same “unsigned 8-bit”, the number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the history set value storage area A2 can be set to It matches the number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the value storage area A1.
Thus, it is possible to prevent omission of information when storing the set value Ve stored in the notification set value storage area A1 in the history set value storage area A2 (see S2163 to S2166 in FIG. 52A). That is, since the number of bits of the history setting value Pv2 is smaller than the number of bits of the notification setting value Pv1, the setting value Ve acquired from the notification setting value storage area A1 cannot be properly stored in the history setting value storage area A2. It is possible to prevent this, and it is possible to ensure that accurate information is displayed as the setting history information.

FIG. 56 exemplifies numerical values of the set value Ve that can be represented by "unsigned 8 bits" as described above.
By using 8 bits, six values from "1" to "6" can be represented as the set value Ve as shown in the figure, and values larger than "6", in other words, abnormal values outside the usable range Re can be expressed. possible to express.
In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store an abnormal value other than the value of the usable range Re as the set value Ve, so that when an abnormality occurs, the cause can be easily identified. ing.

[5-4. Setting Suggestion Effect]

The effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute control for causing a setting suggestion effect to suggest the current set value Ve to the player.
The production control unit 24 of this example provides a suggestive production by the left pattern as described below, a suggestive production by the mini character notice, a suggestive production at the end of the big hit, and a suggestive production by the SU (step-up) notice, as described below. controls to appear.

(Suggestive production by left pattern)

First, the suggestion effect by the left pattern will be explained. The left pattern referred to here means the “left” decorative pattern among the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the left symbol lottery process for lottery for the content of the left symbol.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not it is the special mode 1 in step S2701. That is, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a predetermined mode as "special mode 1".
If it is not the special mode 1, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is the special mode 2 in step S2702. It is determined whether or not the prefetch effect controlled in the mode is won.

In step S2703, if the consecutive reach prefetch is not won, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area (notification setting value storage area A1 described above) of the RAM 243 as the setting value information acquisition process of step S2705. Then, in step S2706, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the set value information, and in subsequent step S2707, the content of the left symbol is determined based on the lottery value.

Here, FIG. 58 shows an example of the left symbol lottery table used in step S2707, and FIG. 59 shows an example of the left symbol lottery offset table used in step S2706. These tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the left symbol lottery table, the winning probability for each symbol content to be selected (in this example, 10 types of symbol content from symbol 0 to symbol 9) is "1" to "6". is determined for each set value Ve of . In the drawings, the value representing the probability of winning is represented by the distribution value on the assumption that the random number for the lottery can take 10000 different values from 0 to 9999, but the values shown in FIGS. As in the case, the threshold value for the lottery random number is actually stored. This point also applies to each table shown in FIGS. 63, 65, 68, 72, and 74 which will be described later.

In the left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 59, a corresponding offset value is stored for each set value Ve of "1" to "6". Specifically, "0" for set value Ve "1", "1" for set value Ve "2", "2" for set value Ve "3", and set value Ve " "3" is stored for the set value Ve "4", "4" is stored for the set value Ve "5", and "5" is stored for the set value Ve "6".

At step S2706 in FIG. 57, an offset value corresponding to the current set value Ve obtained at step S2705 is obtained according to the offset table for the left symbol lottery shown in FIG. Then, in step S2707, among the lottery tables for each set value Ve in the left symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 58, the lottery table at the position (address) specified by the offset value acquired in step S2706 is selected. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value "1" located at the top of the left symbol lottery table (that is, stored in the address with the smallest number) is set to the offset value "1". If the offset value is "2", the set value "2" located second from the top in the left symbol lottery table is selected, and if the offset value is "2", the set value " The lottery table stored in the position specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table No. 3.

Through the series of processes described above, if the current state does not correspond to either the first special mode or the second special mode, and if the continuous reach look-ahead is not elected, the winning probability based on the set value Ve is used for the left symbol. Content will be selected. In other words, the appearance rate of the left symbols 0 to 9 differs depending on the set value Ve, thereby suggesting the type of the set value Ve to the player according to the appearance rate of the specific symbol content of the left symbol. performance is realized.

As shown in FIG. 57, if the CPU 241 determines in step S2701 that the mode is the first special mode, the CPU 241 skips steps S2702 to S2708 and ends the series of processes. That is, under the first special mode, the lottery for the left symbol content is not performed.
In addition, when it is determined that it is the second special mode in step S2702, and when it is determined in step S2703 that the continuous reach prefetch is won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2704 and does not refer to the set value Ve. An offset value is acquired from the offset table, and the process advances to table selection processing in step S2707. That is, in this case, the offset value of "0" in the left symbol lottery offset table is acquired (S2704), and the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected from the left symbol lottery table (S2707). . Therefore, under the second special mode, under the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, the lottery for the left symbol content is performed with a fixed winning probability that does not depend on the set value Ve. In other words, the setting suggestion effect using the left pattern is not performed.

In addition, as described above, in this example, the setting suggestion effect using the left pattern is not performed under the continuous reach prefetch winning state. It is possible to prevent the design content of the selected left design from becoming unmatched.

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process.
First, in this another example, a table shown in FIG. 61 is prepared as a left symbol lottery offset table stored in the ROM 242 . 59 is stored as a first left symbol lottery offset table (FIG. 61A), and a second left symbol lottery offset table different from the first left symbol lottery offset table is stored. A table is stored (FIG. 61B).
In the second left symbol lottery offset table, the same offset value ("2" in this example) is stored for the set values Ve of "1" to "6".

In the left symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 60, the processes of steps S2710 and S2711 are executed in place of the process of step S2704 shown in FIG. The difference is that
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the setting value information in step S2710, and acquires the offset value from the second offset table based on the setting value information in the subsequent step S2711. , the process advances to lottery table selection processing in step S2707.
Since the offset value acquired in step S2711 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve in the selection process of step S2707 in this case.
In this another example, the first left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 61A is used as the offset table in step S2706.

In this way, in the second special mode, a fixed offset value is acquired without referring to the set value Ve as a method for performing the left pattern lottery that does not depend on the set value Ve corresponding to the continuous reach look-ahead winning. The method is not limited to this method, and a method of referring to an offset table storing the same offset value for each set value Ve as shown in FIG. 61B and selecting the same lottery table regardless of the set value Ve can be adopted. can also

(Suggestion production by mini character notice)

FIG. 62 is a flow chart of the mini-character advance notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241 .
First, as a premise, in the gaming machine 1 of the present example, two types of mini-character advance notice effects, a first mini-character advance notice effect and a second mini-character notice effect, can be displayed. It should be noted that, regarding the first mini-character announcement effect and the second mini-character announcement effect, the lottery process itself for determining whether or not to make the announcement effect appear has already been executed as a separate process from the process shown in FIG.
In this example, the first mini-character foretelling effect is not an effect suggesting the set value Ve, but an effect for suggesting the set value Ve can be produced as the second mini-character forewarning effect.

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 determines in step S2801 whether or not the mini-character announcement effect has been won. If the mini-character advance notice effect is not won, the CPU 241 ends the mini-character advance notice lottery process in FIG. 62 without executing the series of processes described below.

If the mini-character notice effect has been won, the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 whether or not the content of the win is the first mini-character notice.
If the CPU 241 determines that the first mini-character announcement effect has been won and the winning content is the first mini-character announcement, the CPU 241 performs the variation pattern information acquisition process in step S2803. After performing the process of acquiring the variation pattern information, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the winning variation pattern in step S2804, and the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed in subsequent step S2805. .

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mini-character advance notice lottery table used in step S2805, and FIG. 64 shows an example of the first advance notice offset table used in step S2804. These tables are stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242, respectively.
In the first advance notice offset table shown in FIG. ”), an offset value is defined for each. In this example, the short fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s", and the reach fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal reach", super reach fluctuation The pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4". has an offset value of 2, respectively.

In the first mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 63, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared that determine the distribution of the winning probability for each content of the first mini-character advance notice. In this example, there are 5 types of content for the first mini character notice: "none", "pending change explanation", "strong notice explanation", "variable mode explanation", and "character introduction". Three types of tables, Table 1 to Table 3, are prepared, which determine the allocation of the winning probability to the content.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2804, the offset value is acquired from the first notice offset table shown in FIG. 64 based on the information of the winning variation pattern specified from the acquired variation pattern information, In the selection process, a lottery table is selected from the first mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 63 based on the offset value. Specifically, in this example, when the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is obtained as the offset value, Table 1 is selected. Also, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as an offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as an offset value, table 3 is selected.

In step S2806 following step S2805, the CPU 241 determines the content of the first mini character announcement based on the selection value, and ends the mini character announcement lottery process shown in FIG. That is, the content of the first mini-character announcement is determined according to the distribution value in the table selected from tables 1-3.
In this way, the first mini-character advance notice effect is not effected according to the set value Ve, but is effected according to the variation pattern.

Also, if the CPU 241 determines in the preceding step S2802 that the winning content is not the first mini character announcement, it acquires setting change information in step S2807, and determines whether or not the setting has been changed in the following step S2808. That is, the latest individual history information among the individual history information stored for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs described above is acquired, and whether or not the "type" information in the individual history information is "setting change" is determined. determine whether

If a negative result is obtained in step S2808 that the "type" information is not "setting change" and the setting has not been changed, the CPU 241 advances to step S2809 to execute setting value information acquisition processing. In step S2810, an offset value is obtained from the offset table based on the set value information, in subsequent step S2811 processing is performed to select a lottery table based on the offset value, and in step S2820 a second mini character announcement is made based on the lottery value. Determine content.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the second mini character notice lottery table used in step S2811, and FIG. 66 shows an example of the second notice offset table used in step S2810 (these tables are also stored in the ROM 242). (stored in a predetermined area of ).
In the second advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, an offset value is defined for each set value Ve. In the second notice offset table of this example, the offset values are set not only for the set values Ve "1" to "6", but also for the values "for raising" and "for lowering". Yes, but more on that later.

In the second mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 65, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared that determine the distribution of the winning probability for each content of the second mini-character advance notice. In this example, the content of the second mini character notice is "none", "explanation of game nature", "explanation of setting suggestion 1", "explanation of setting suggestion 2", "explanation of setting suggestion 3", "explanation of setting suggestion 4", and "explanation of setting suggestion 5". As a lottery table, a table that determines the distribution of the winning probability for these contents is set for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "for raising" and "for lowering" A total of 8 types are available.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2810, the offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2809 is acquired from the second notice offset table shown in FIG. , a lottery table is selected from the second mini-character advance notice lottery table shown in FIG.
Then, in the determination processing of step S2820 following step S2811, processing of determining the content of the second mini-character announcement according to the selected lottery table is performed.

If the CPU 241 obtains an affirmative result that the above-mentioned "type" information is "setting change" in step S2808 and that the setting has been changed, the CPU 241 advances to step S2812 to obtain the previous and current set value information. is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the set value is higher than the previous time in the subsequent step S2813.
That is, the setting value Ve information included in the individual history information stored at the time of the previous setting change among the individual history information whose “type” information is “setting change” and the “notification setting value storage area A1” of the RAM 243 , and determines whether the latter set value Ve is greater than the former set value Ve.

If a negative result is obtained in step S2813 that the latest set value Ve is not greater than the previous set value Ve and the set value is not higher than the previous set value, the CPU 241 advances to step S2814 to perform the first set value Ve. A selection value is obtained, and in subsequent step S2815, an offset value is obtained from the offset table based on the first selection value. That is, the offset value is obtained from the second advance notice offset table in FIG. Here, the first selection value is a value for selecting the address corresponding to "for lowering" shown in FIG. An offset value corresponding to "for lowering" is obtained from the offset table.
Then, in step S2816 following step S2815, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, selects a table corresponding to "lowering" from the second mini-character advance notice lottery table in FIG. , the process advances to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the contents of the second mini-character announcement effect when the setting value Ve is changed to lower the set value Ve are determined based on the "for lowering" lottery table.

On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step S2813 that the set value is higher than the previous time, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2817 to acquire the second selection value, and in subsequent step S2818, based on the second selection value Get the offset value from the offset table. The second selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to "for raising" shown in FIG. An offset value corresponding to "for raising" is acquired.
Then, in step S2819 following step S2818, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, selects a table corresponding to "for promotion" from the second mini-character advance notice lottery table in FIG. , the process advances to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the contents of the second mini-character announcement effect when the setting is changed to raise the set value Ve are determined based on the "for raising" lottery table.

According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, in this example, the winning probabilities of the notice contents "none", "explanation of game characteristics", "explanation of setting suggestion 1", "explanation of setting suggestion 2", and "explanation of setting suggestion 3" are "for raising" and " However, the probability of winning is different between "for raising" and "for lowering" for "setting suggestion explanation 4" and "setting suggestion explanation 5". Regarding "setting suggestion explanation 4", the winning probabilities of setting values Ve "1" to "6" and "for lowering" are all set to "0", while the winning probabilities of "for raising" are other than "0", Specifically, in this example, it is set to "1000/10000", and therefore, "setting suggestion explanation 4" is an advance notice content that can appear only in the case of "for raising". In addition, with respect to the "set suggestion explanation 5", the set value Ve "1" to "6" and the winning probability of "for raising" are all set to "0", while the winning probability of "for lowering" is "0". ("1000/10000" in this example), and accordingly, "setting suggestion explanation 5" is an advance notice content that can appear only in the case of "for lowering".

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 finishes the mini-character advance notice lottery process in response to executing the determination process in step S2820.

Here, in determining whether or not the setting value is higher than the previous time in step S2813, the setting value Ve stored in the "history setting value storage area A2" in the RAM 243 and the "notification setting value storage area At this time, an area ( A "previous set value storage area A3") may be provided.
In this case, the memory 244 stores the previous setting value Ve separately from the setting history information. The value written in the memory 244 can be read out to the "previous set value storage area A3" when the power is turned on.
As for the lottery for the effect, the increase/decrease is determined by comparing the values of the "previous set value storage area A3" and the "notified set value storage area A1".

In step S2813, if the previous and current set values Ve are the same, the second mini-character notice lottery table is referenced with the current set value Ve stored in the "notification set value storage area A1" as an offset. can be considered.

(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)

FIG. 67 is a flow chart of the jackpot effect lottery process executed by the CPU 241 .
The lottery process shown in FIG. 67 is a process of lottery based on the set value Ve for the content of the jackpot end INT (interval) effect that appears in response to the execution of the specified number of rounds of the round game. Specifically, a background image is selected by lottery in the INT effect at the end of the big hit.
Here, for the sake of explanation, it is assumed that the types of hits are three types of "3R probability variation", "9R probability variation", and "3R time saving".

First, in step S2901, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the winning type is "3R probability variation". The type of winning is notified by, for example, a decorative design designation command transmitted from the main control unit 20. FIG.
If the hit type is not "3R probability variation", the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2902 to determine whether the hit type is "9R probability variation". The jackpot performance lottery processing is finished. That is, when the hit type is "3R short working hours", setting suggestions by the jackpot end INT effect are not performed.

When the hit type is "3R probability variation" in step S2901, and when the hit type is "9R probability variation" in step S2902, respectively, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2903 and determines whether the probability variation is in progress determine whether or not This corresponds to judging whether or not the hit of this time is the hit of Renso (whether or not it is the first hit).

If it is determined that the probability is not changing, that is, it is the first hit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2904 to execute set value information acquisition processing, and acquires the offset value from the first offset table based on the set value information in step S2905. Then, in the following step S2906, processing for selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed. Further, the CPU 241 advances to step S2910 to determine the suggested element during the big hit end INT based on the lottery value.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table for lottery of jackpot end INT suggestion elements used in step S2906 (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot end INT suggestion element table"), and FIG. Examples of offset tables are shown (these tables are also stored in predetermined areas of the ROM 242).
In the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, an offset value is defined for each set value Ve. Specifically, offset values of "0" to "5" are determined for set values Ve "1" to "6" as shown in the drawing.

In the jackpot end INT suggestive element table of FIG. 68, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared which determine the distribution of the winning probability for each content of the jackpot end INT effect. In this example, the background image in the jackpot end INT effect is used for the setting suggestion, and as shown in the figure, there are a total of 13 types of contents: "none (no predetermined background image)" and "background 1" to "background 12". are prepared, and as the lottery table, a plurality of tables are prepared that determine the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents.
In the jackpot end INT suggestive element table of this example, as these lottery tables, six that determine the distribution for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" are stored in order from the upper layer side, and for the lower layer side, Further, there are stored six values that define allocation for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6". The six lottery tables on the upper layer side are tables that define allocation for each set value Ve corresponding to the first win, and the six lottery tables on the lower layer side are tables that determine allocation for each set value Ve corresponding to consecutive games. It is said that

In FIG. 67, in the acquisition process of step S2905, the offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S2904 is acquired from the first offset table shown in FIG. Then, a lottery table is selected from the jackpot end INT suggestion element table shown in FIG. At this time, in the first offset table, the offset value for the set value Ve is in the range of "0" to "5", so in the selection process of step S2906, a lottery is drawn from six upper layers in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. A table is selected. In other words, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from among the lottery tables corresponding to the first win.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed following step S2906, the process of determining the background (may be absent) as a suggestive element during the jackpot end INT according to the selected lottery table is performed.

Also, in step S2903, when it is determined that the probability is changing, that is, it is the time of continuous residence, the CPU 241 advances to step S2907 to execute setting value information acquisition processing, and then in step S2908 based on the setting value information. to acquire the offset value from the second offset table, and in subsequent step S2909, processing for selecting a lottery table based on the offset value is performed, and determination processing in step S2910 is performed.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the second offset table (also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242 as the second offset table) used in step S2908.
As shown, in the second offset table, offset values "6" to "11" are defined for the set values Ve "1" to "6".
Therefore, in the acquisition process of step S2908, a lottery table is selected from among the six lower layer side in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table, that is, a lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve from among the lottery tables corresponding to the time of consecutive residences. is selected.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed subsequent to step S2909, the process of determining the background (may be absent) as a suggestive element during the jackpot end INT according to the lottery table selected in step S2909 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this example, the lottery table stored on the upper layer side corresponding to the first win has a distribution value of 0 for the background 7 to background 12, and the lottery table corresponding to the consecutive game on the lower layer side. , the sorting value for background 1 to background 6 is set to 0. As a result, the backgrounds 1 to 6 do not appear at the time of consecutive games (they do not appear as setting suggestion elements), and the backgrounds 7 to 12 do not appear at the first time.

The CPU 241 finishes the big hit effect lottery process shown in FIG. 67 in response to executing the determination process of step S2910.

Here, as described above, offset tables (FIGS. 69 and 70) defining different offset values for the common set value Ve are provided, and these offset tables are selectively used according to the conditions to end the jackpot as shown in FIG. By performing a lottery using the INT suggestive element table, when performing a lottery different for each condition as a setting suggestive element lottery, the table reference processing can be made common processing, and the program capacity can be reduced. can.

(Suggestion production by SU notice)

Next, the suggestion effect by the SU notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. FIG.
The SU notice effect is a kind of notice effect for notifying the possibility of controlling to an advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and is an effect having one to a plurality of steps of notice steps. In other words, it is a stage announcement effect having stages.
In this example, the content of the SU advance notice effect, specifically, the effect suggesting the set value Ve can be produced using the background image.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the SU advance notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241. FIG.
First, the CPU 241 performs a process of acquiring information of a winning variation pattern based on the above-described decorative design designation command, for example, as the variation pattern information acquisition process of step S3001. Next, in step S3002, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value from the offset table based on the winning variation pattern, selects the lottery table based on the offset value in step S3003, and selects the lottery table based on the lottery value in step S3004. and determine the contents.

FIG. 72 shows an example of the SU effect table used in the selection process of step S3003, and FIG. 73 shows an example of the SU stage lottery offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3002 (these tables are also given in the ROM 242). stored in each area).
In the SU stage lottery offset table shown in FIG. 73, similarly to the first notice offset table shown in FIG. ), the offset value is determined for each super reach fluctuation pattern ("SP reach P"), and in this example, 0 for the short fluctuation pattern, 1 for the reach fluctuation pattern, and 2 offset for the super reach fluctuation pattern Each value is defined.

In the SU effect table of FIG. 72, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared that determine the distribution of the winning probability for each lottery object related to the SU notice effect. In this example, the lottery target as SU notice effect "none" and each lottery as SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) Three types of lottery tables are prepared, each of which defines a distribution value for each object (“Table 1,” “Table 2,” and “Table 3” in the figure). Here, the brackets such as (white frame) attached after SU1 to SU5 representing the SU stage mean the content of the SU notice effect, specifically the type of background image, for example (white frame) A background image with a white frame, and (character A) and (character B) each mean a background image including an image of a specific character.
In the SU effect table, "table 1", "table 2" and "table 3" are stored in order from the upper layer side.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3002, the offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 73 based on the information of the winning variation pattern, and in the selection process of step S3003, the table shown in FIG. 72 is based on the offset value A lottery table is selected from Specifically, in this example, if the winning variation pattern is a short variation pattern and 0 is obtained as the offset value, Table 1 is selected. Also, if the winning variation pattern is a reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as an offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as an offset value, table 3 is selected.
Then, in step S3004 following step S3003, the CPU 241 selects the stored value (lottery value) of the table selected from the tables 1 to 3 and the random value for the lottery, and the SU announcement effect "none". , SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B). That is, it determines the stage and content of the SU.

In addition, according to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 72 (in this case also, the random number for the lottery can take 10000 ways from 1 to 9999), in the table 1 corresponding to the short fluctuation pattern, the SU notice effect "No ” has the highest winning probability, followed by SU1 (white frame). ) has a winning probability of 0.
In table 2 corresponding to the reach fluctuation pattern, SU5 (character B), SU4 (character A), SU notice effect "none", SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame) in that order Gradually increase your odds of winning.
In table 3 corresponding to the super reach fluctuation pattern, the winning probability of SU5 (character B) is the highest, and thereafter SU4 (character A), SU3 (white frame), and SU notice effect "none" gradually in order. The winning probabilities are lowered, and the winning probabilities of SU1 (white frame) and SU2 (white frame) are the lowest.

After executing the process of step S3004, the CPU 241 determines whether or not SU3 or higher is won in step S3005. That is, it is determined whether or not any of SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) has been determined in step S3004.
If SU3 or more is not won, the CPU 241 ends the SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. That is, in the case where SU2 or lower is won, the processing for replacing the content of the SU notice effect, which will be described below, is not performed.

On the other hand, if SU3 or higher has been won, the CPU 241 advances to step S3006 to determine whether or not the previous SU3 danger was lost. That is, the SU notice effect that appeared last time is an SU notice effect of SU3 or higher in which the background is replaced with the background of the danger pattern frame by content replacement using the SU3 replacement table described later, and the SU notice effect is the target of the notice. It is determined whether or not a determination result of a failure is obtained in the symbol variation display game.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the previous SU3 danger was lost, the CPU 241 advances to step S3007, acquires the offset value from the offset table without referring to the set value, and then draws a lottery table based on the offset value in step S3008. is selected, and in step S3012, the content of replacement for SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the SU3 replacement table used in the selection process of step S3008, and FIG. 75 shows an example of the SU3 replacement offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3007 (these tables are also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242). stored respectively).
In the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, an offset value is determined for each set value Ve. "5" is defined.
In the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. 74, a lottery table is prepared for each set value Ve, which defines a sorting value for each replacement content of "default", "red", and "danger". Here, "default" means that the frame in the background is not replaced, and "red" and "danger" mean that the frame is replaced with red and danger patterns, respectively.
As shown in the figure, in the SU3 replacement table, the lottery table with the set value Ve "1" is stored in the highest layer, and thereafter, the lottery table with the larger set value Ve is stored in the lower layer. there is

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3007, the offset value is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75 without referring to the set value Ve. That is, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" in the offset table. Then, in the selection process of step S3008, a lottery table is selected from the SU3 replacement table based on the offset value "0" thus obtained. Specifically, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" stored in the highest layer in the SU3 replacement table is selected.
Then, in the decision processing of step S3012 that is executed following step S3008, the replacement content is decided from among "default", "red" and "danger" based on the lottery table thus selected.

Here, according to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table with the highest winning probability of "default" is selected by performing the processing of steps S3007→S3008→S3012. That is, the lottery table with the lowest possibility of replacement is selected. As a result, when SU3 danger was missed last time, it becomes difficult to perform the SU announcement effect by SU3 danger again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the preceding step S3006 that the previous SU3 danger has come off, the CPU 241 executes set value information acquisition processing in step S3009, and then acquires an offset value from the offset table based on the set value information in step S3010. Then, in subsequent step S3011, a lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S3012, processing for determining the replacement contents of SU3 is performed based on the lottery value.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of step S3010, the offset value corresponding to the setting value Ve acquired in step S3009 is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. A lottery table based on the acquired offset value is selected from the replacement table. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value Ve "1" stored in the top layer position is selected, and if the offset value is "1", it is stored in the position next to the top layer position. The lottery table stored at the position (address) specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table with the set value "2".
Then, in the decision processing in step S3012 in this case, the replacement content is decided from among "default", "red" and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in step S3011.

According to the example of the distribution values shown in FIG. 74, in the SU3 replacement table in this case, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of "default", while the higher the "red" setting, the higher the winning probability. It is As for "Danger", the probability of winning is lower than that of "Danger" and "Red" regardless of the setting value Ve, and the probability of winning is highest when the setting value Ve is the maximum setting of "6". has been In this example, the winning probability of "Danger" is the same for the set values Ve "1" to "5", and the winning probability is increased only for the set value Ve "6".

The CPU 241 finishes the SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. 71 in response to executing the determination process of step S3012.

As can be understood from the series of processes described above, in the present embodiment, the "stage" of the SU notice effect (stage notice effect) can be determined based on the variation information, and the "content" of the SU notice effect is set to the set value Ve. can be determined based on Specifically, in this example, the "contents" of the SU notice effect can be determined by replacement.

As for the setting suggestion using the staged announcement performance, if the stage of the staged announcement performance is determined based on the set value, the staged announcement performance will be difficult to develop, and it will be difficult to enhance the performance effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the step notice effect can be determined according to the variation information, and the details of the step notice effect can be determined based on the set value.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the development of the staged advance notice performance from becoming difficult when realizing the setting suggestion performance using the stepped advance notice performance, and to enhance the performance effect.

Usually, a game machine is equipped with multiple types of notice effects, but among them, all of the notices having stages as the content of the notice effects may be configured as described above, or only some of the notices may be implemented as described above. You may make it become such a structure. Further, in order to enhance the performance interest, some of the notices may be configured so that the "step" is determined based on the set value Ve and the "content" is determined based on the variation information. By doing this, it is possible to give different features to the notices, and to improve the production interest.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing another example of SU advance notice lottery processing.
First, in this another example, the table shown in FIG. 77 is prepared as the SU3 replacement offset table stored in the ROM 242 . 75 is stored as a first offset table for SU3 replacement (FIG. 77A), and a second offset table for SU3 replacement, which is different from the first offset table for SU3 replacement, is stored. (Fig. 77B).
In the second offset table for SU3 replacement, the same offset value (“0” in this example) is stored for the set values Ve of “1” to “6”.

The SU advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. 76 is different in that the processes of steps S3020 and S3021 are executed instead of the process of step S3007 shown in FIG.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the setting value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the setting value information in step S3020. is obtained, and the process proceeds to the lottery table selection process in step S3008.
Since the offset value acquired in step S3021 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve in the selection process of step S3008 in this case. Specifically, in this example, since the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected, the lottery table in which content replacement is least likely to occur is selected as in the processing example of FIG. become.
In addition, in the acquisition process of step S3010 in this case, the first offset table for SU3 replacement shown in FIG. 77A is used as the offset table.

As described above, the method for selecting the same lottery table without depending on the set value Ve is not limited to the method of obtaining a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve. A method of selecting a lottery table based on an offset value acquired from an offset table storing the same offset value for each set value Ve can also be adopted.

Here, it is conceivable to perform the lottery for the SU advance notice effect in the following manner.
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of a lottery mode example of the SU advance notice effect in the embodiment.
First, in the drawing, developments M06J-1, M06J-2, and M06J-3 shown in the lower left part of the upper table mean the following developments, respectively.

M06J-1: Staying in a specific background mode, not winning the pre-reading notice and winning the target SU notice (fireworks launch SU notice)

M06J-2: A state of staying in a specific background mode and running a pre-reading notice and winning the target SU notice

M06J-3: While staying in a specific background mode, the change wins the target change of the pre-reading notice and the target SU notice

In development M06J-1, lottery for target SU notice is performed based on table TBL1. Further, in development M06J-2 and development M06J-3, a lottery for target SU notice is performed based on table TBL2 and table TBL3, respectively.

In development M06J-1, development M06L-1 is the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL1, and the case where SU5 is won.
Further, in expansion M06J-2, the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL2, and the case where SU5 is won is assumed to be expansion M06L-2.
Furthermore, in expansion M06J-3, the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on table TBL3, and the case where SU5 is won is assumed to be expansion M06L-3.
In addition, in these developments M06L-1 to M06L-3, when SU5 is won, a lottery based on tables TBL4, TBL5, and TBL6 is performed for the contents of SU5.

The table at the bottom of FIG. 78 illustrates a lottery method for content replacement (background replacement) of SU3 for each development of M06L-1 to M06L-3.
As shown in the figure, in deployment M06L-1, it is determined whether or not there was a previous danger (see step S3006). If it is out of danger in the previous time, there is no branching for each set value Ve, and the contents of replacement are selected based on the table TBL4.
On the other hand, if there is no deviation due to the previous danger, the lottery method branches for each set value Ve. Specifically, replacement contents are randomly selected using different tables (tables TBL5 to TBL10 in the figure) for each set value Ve of "1" to "6."

Further, in expansion M06L-2 and expansion M06L-3, there is no branching depending on whether or not the previous danger has come off, and there is no branching based on the set value Ve, and replacement contents are selected based on tables TBL11 and TBL12 as shown.

In the lottery method described above, it is possible to suggest a setting by means of an SU notice in the state of non-winning in the pre-reading notice as development M06J-1.
This makes it possible to use the role of SU notice for the purpose of suggesting the reliability of the fluctuation for fluctuations with low hit expectations that are not so far as to look ahead and for fluctuations that do not execute look-ahead notice toward the target fluctuation of look-ahead. can be used to suggest a setting rather than

Also, in the state where the pre-reading notice is being executed as the development M06J-2, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
If you are running a pre-reading notice using multiple fluctuations, and if you win the SU notice in the middle of the pre-reading, the most pre-reading that suggests the winning expectation towards the pre-reading target fluctuation Since it is medium, it is not used for the purpose of suggesting the setting as a role of SU notice. In other words, the look-ahead notice suggests the degree of expectation for winning towards the target change, and the player's interest is focused on it. We are trying to prevent confusion.

Furthermore, even in the state where the change is the target change of the pre-reading notice as development M06J-3, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
In this case, the fluctuation is a target fluctuation of the foresight, and it is a fluctuation with a high degree of expectation for winning. By doing so, we are trying to prevent players from getting confused.

As the lottery method described above, development M06L-1, development M06L-2, and development M06L-3 are adopted, but any one of them may be adopted, or any combination thereof may be adopted. good.
Regarding deployment M06L-2, if there are multiple types of pre-reading notices, it is configured so that setting suggestions by SU notice are not performed only during execution of specific pre-reading notices (e.g. full-screen pre-reading notices, etc.), and other It may be configured to suggest setting by SU notice during execution of pre-read notice (eg pending change notice).
With respect to deployment M06L-3, if there are multiple types of pre-reading notices, if the change is a target change of a specific pre-reading notice (e.g., full-screen pre-reading notice, etc.), setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed. , and in a state in which the change is a target change of other pre-reading notice (eg, pending change notice, etc.), setting suggestion may be performed by SU notice.
Also, if the variation is a hit variation, the setting suggestion is not performed by the setting suggestion notice including the setting suggestion element such as the above-mentioned SU notice, and if the variation is a loss variation, the setting suggestion is not performed. may be configured to do so.

[5-5. Regarding the difference in the range of setting values that the main control unit and the production control unit correspond]

Here, as can be understood from the various lottery processes of the effect control unit 24 described above, the effect control unit 24 determines that the set value Ve is within the actual usage range Ru ("1", "2", and "6" in this example). ), if the value is within the usable range Re (“1” to “6”), the effect lottery is performed normally without causing an error.

On the other hand, the main control unit 20 cannot execute at least specific processing related to the progress of the game unless the set value Ve is within the actual use range Ru. For example, in the jackpot random number determination process (S1502) described with reference to FIGS. It becomes impossible to obtain a proper judgment reference value TH and setting difference information from the random number judgment table for judging a big hit, and the judging of a big hit cannot be properly executed.

The difference in correspondence to the setting values of the main control section 20 and the production control section 24 as described above can be expressed as follows.
That is, the main control unit 20 can set any one setting value out of N (N is a natural number equal to or greater than 2) types by the setting change process (step S115), and based on the N types of setting values , the first process relating to the progress of the game operation can be executed.
On the other hand, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation based on M types of setting value information, which is more than N types, regarding the setting value information regarding the setting values received from the main control unit 20. It is said that

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process regarding the progress of the effect operation up to the M stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24, as described with reference to FIG. Regarding the setting value information as the middle command and the setting change command, it is possible to analyze not three types of setting value information corresponding to the actual use range Ru, but six types of setting value information corresponding to the usable range Re. ing.
Specifically, for these setting confirmation command and setting change command, it is possible to receive a command including any of the identification data "1" to "6" in steps S2150 and S2152. command can be analyzed.

That is, if the three types of set values Ve corresponding to the usage range Ru are N types of set values that can be set in the setting change process, the effect control unit 24 has M types of set values, which are more than N types. It is configured so that information can be analyzed.

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value Ve, the effect control unit 24 can analyze the set value information up to M stages. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of setting values to be used while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24, when the setting value Vd set in the setting change process on the main control unit 20 side and the setting value analysis information based on the analyzed setting value information correspond ( For example, if the set value Ve indicated by the set value Vd and the set value Ve indicated by the set value analysis information match), even if they do not correspond, predetermined processing (various effect lottery processing described in FIGS. 57 to 77) is performed. configured to run.

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value Ve, the effect control unit 24 can execute processing up to the M stage, and the program of the effect control unit 24 does not need to be rewritten up to the M stage. It becomes possible to
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value Ve while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

Here, according to the process of FIG. 52A, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the setting change end command has been received in step S2154, the setting value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within the appropriate range. Without confirming whether or not there is (see step S2162), setting change end scenario registration processing is executed in step S2158.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance control section 24 from notifying the abnormality of the set value when the main control section 20 is about to normally end the setting change process. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the main control unit 20 advances the subsequent game operation in response to the normal end of the setting change process even though the effect control unit 24 side is performing the abnormality notification, and the game is performed. It is possible to prevent people from feeling uneasy.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within the usable range Re in step S2162, and if it is within the usable range Re The received setting value Ve (identification data described above) is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, the above-described "report setting value storage area A1"), and if it is outside the usable range Re, the received setting value Ve is stored in the RAM 243. I assume not.
When the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243. However, in this embodiment, the "set value command" is transmitted at a plurality of timings other than when the setting is changed. is transmitted at least when power is restored (S808 when power is restored) and when fluctuation starts (S1411). Appropriate set values Ve can be stored in the RAM 243 .

The set value command can also be sent during the customer waiting demo, at the start or end of a big win or a small win, at the start of a round game, at the start of INT between rounds, etc., in addition to the timings exemplified above.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the set value Ve is within the usable range Re, it is stored in the RAM 243 as it is even if it is not within the usable range Ru. Like the lottery processing (FIGS. 57 to 77, etc.) related to various effects, in the present embodiment, the lottery processing corresponds to the set value Ve of the usable range Re, so the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Ru. Even if it is not, a bug does not occur in the effect lottery process.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, (See step S2404 in FIG. 53).
However, even if the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the history set value storage area A2 in this way, it is not possible to check for an abnormality in the set value Ve during the transmission process in step S2607 (FIG. 55). Thus, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate setting value Ve outside the usable range Re from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
As described above, as the abnormality confirmation process at this time, after determining whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is history information on setting changes (setting change history information), In some cases, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve included in the history information is outside the usable range Re. If the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, liquid crystal control is performed. The instruction information of the abnormal display is transmitted to the unit 40 . As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that the setting value Ve in the corresponding individual history information is found to be abnormal (for example, displaying an "E" mark indicating an error).

<6. Variation>

Here, in the above, the setting value Ve set in the setting change process (S115) shown in FIG. 10 (the setting value Ve saved in step S416) is set in the main loop pre-processing (S119) shown in FIG. Although the example of transmitting to the production control unit 24 side by the value command (S808) was given, the set value Ve set by the setting change process can also be transmitted to the production control unit 24 by a command at the end of the setting change. Specifically, in the embodiment, the setting change end command is transmitted (S605, S606) in the RAM clearing process (S116) shown in FIG. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a “setting change completion command” containing the setting value Ve set in the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 .

Further, in the process of FIG. 52A described above, the process (S2163) in which the effect control unit 24 stores the set value Ve in the RAM 243 can be executed each time a set value command from the main control unit 20 is received. However, the process of storing the set value Ve in the RAM 243 may be performed only when the setting is changed.
When the setting value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed in this way, when the setting value Ve is outside the usable range Re as in the processing shown in FIG. is not stored (route from S2162 to S2164), the set value Ve will not be set in the RAM 243 .
Therefore, in this case, if the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, a value representing the set value Ve "1" (in other words, a value representing the lowest level of the set value Ve) is stored in the RAM 243. While preventing an abnormal setting value Ve from being set in the RAM 243, it is also possible to prevent the setting of the setting value Ve from being stopped.

FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of setting-related command processing S2130e as a first modified example, including storage of the lowest level value as described above.
The setting-related command process S2130e as the first modification corresponds to the case where the main control unit 20 transmits the set value Ve set in the setting change process to the production control unit 24 side by the above-described "setting change completion command". It is considered to be processed.
The difference from the process shown in FIG. 52A is that the reception determination process of the setting change end command in step S2154 is omitted, the process of steps S2159 to S2161 and the process of step S2164 are omitted, and step S2181. processing is added.

In the processing shown in FIG. 79, the CPU 241 first performs reception determination processing of the “setting change completion command” in step S2180. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command including notification information (identification data) of any of setting values Ve "1" to "6" has been received as a "setting change completion command".
If it is determined in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has not been received, CPU 241 advances the process to step S2150. In this case, the CPU 241 advances the process to step S2153 in response to obtaining a negative result in step S2151. Also, if a negative result is obtained in step S2153, the CPU 241 ends the series of processes shown in FIG.
Furthermore, in this case, the CPU 241 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 79 in response to execution of each scenario registration process in steps S2155 to S2157.

On the other hand, when determining in step S2180 that a "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, CPU 241 executes setting change end scenario registration processing in step S2158.
As a result of the determination process in step S2180, if the setting value Ve included in the received "setting change completion command" is within the usable range Re of "1" to "6", then in step S2158 the setting change end scenario is determined. be registered. That is, even when the unused set value Ve within the usable range Re is received, an effect is performed to notify the end of the setting change.

In response to executing the scenario registration process in step S2158, the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 whether or not the setting information is the usable range Re.
Then, if the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value information in the RAM in step S2163, and proceeds to the history information updating process in step S2166.
On the other hand, if the setting information is not within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the setting value "1" in the RAM 243 in step S2181, and proceeds to the history information updating process in step S2166.

By the processing as the first modified example as described above, in response to the case where the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed, if the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, the RAM 243 stores a specific value ( In this example, "1") can be stored.

Note that when a specific value (“1”) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 243 (“notification setting value storage area A1” described above) as in the first modification described above, the setting value in the setting history information A specific value (“1”) may also be stored for Ve (that is, the “history setting value storage area A2” described above).
Alternatively, an abnormal value may be stored in the setting history information.
By storing the abnormal value in the setting history information, it becomes possible to store the fact that the setting value Ve is abnormal as the history information while performing the game lottery based on the specific value.

Here, when the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243, it is possible to determine whether the set value Ve is within the usable range Ru instead of whether it is within the usable range Re.
For example, when the set values Ve to be used are "1", "2", and "6" as in this example, first, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re. If the value is within the possible range Re, it is further determined whether or not the set value Ve is an unused value (one of "3", "4", and "5").
At this time, if the set value Ve is not an unused value, the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 as it is. On the other hand, if the set value Ve is an unused value, it is conceivable to store a specific value (“1”) in the RAM 243 . Alternatively, if the set value Ve is an unused value, the set value Ve can be corrected to a value within the use range Ru and stored in the RAM 243 . For example, when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2", and when it is "5", it is corrected to "6".

FIG. 80 shows a flowchart of setting-related command processing S2130e as a second modification including correction of the set value Ve as described above.
The difference from the process shown in FIG. 79 is that the processes of steps S2182 and S2183 are added.
In this case, in response to determining in step S2162 that the setting information is within the usable range Re, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2182 to determine whether or not the setting information is an unused value. Specifically, in this example, it is determined whether the set value Ve is any one of "3", "4", and "5" (any one of "02H", "03H", and "04H").
When determining that the setting information is not an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2163 and stores the setting information in the RAM 243 . On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information is an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2183 and stores the correction value in the RAM 243 with reference to the setting value correction table. Specifically, in this example, a set value correction table (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242) is referred to, and when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2", and "5" is corrected. When this is the case, it is corrected to "6" and the corrected setting value Ve is stored in the "report setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243. FIG.

Here, in the description so far, the main control unit 20 uses the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. Although an example of conversion to the value Ve was given, the main control unit 20 transmits the information of the setting value Vd to the production control unit 24 without performing conversion using the setting value offset conversion table, and sets it on the production control unit 24 side. A configuration for converting the value Vd can also be adopted.
FIG. 81 shows an example of a set value conversion table to be used on the effect control section 24 side in this case. Here, it is assumed that the level of the setting value Ve and the values to be used are uniquely determined by the spec information of the gaming machine 1 .

As shown in the figure, in the setting value conversion table, the information of the setting value Vd transmitted by the main control unit 20 side, specifically, the conversion table storing the conversion values for each of "0" to "5" is stored in the specification (Fig. There are 4 types of "Spec 1" to "Spec 4").

In this case, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) selects the corresponding conversion table from the setting conversion table based on the information of the spec specified by the spec specifying command described above, for example, and sets the setting value Vd received from the main control unit 20. is converted based on the selected conversion table.
Here, "spec 1" has six levels of settings, and the main control unit 20 in this case uses "0" to "5" as the set value Vd. "Spec 2" and "Spec 3" are set in two steps and three steps, respectively, and the main control unit 20 uses "0", "1", and "0" to "3" as the set value Vd, respectively. "Spec 4" is "no setting", and in this case, "0" is stored as the conversion value for each set value Vd as shown.

By adopting a configuration in which set value conversion is performed on the performance control unit 24 side as described above, the processing load on the main control unit 20 side can be reduced.

<7. Summary of Embodiments>

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment includes control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of game operations, and whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. A setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the winning probability, and a storage means (ROM 202) in which data used by the control means for progress control are stored.
The storage means stores a data table (for example, the setting value offset conversion table in FIG. 16) including a plurality of setting value related information selected by referring to the setting values. First setting value related information that is setting value related information that is selected when a setting value that can be set by the means is referred to, and setting value related information that is selected when a setting value that cannot be set by the setting means is referred to a certain second set value related information is included, and as the first set value related information, at least specific information related to a set value representing the stage with the lowest winning probability is stored, and the second set value related information , the same information as the specific information is stored.

When the set value is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value stored in the RAM with a value representing the lowest level.
However, if it is tampered with after being rewritten, there is a risk that the corresponding information will be obtained from the data table based on the setting value that cannot be set, and that the operation that corresponds to the setting value that cannot be set will be realized.
According to the above configuration, since it is impossible to obtain information corresponding to the setting value that cannot be set from the data table, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and to improve the fairness of the game. can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine as the embodiment, 0 is stored as specific information.

As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud due to falsification of setting values by a simple method of writing specific information=0 in the setting value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be enhanced by a simple method.

In addition, the pachinko game machine (1) of the embodiment includes control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of game motions, and control means (main control unit 20) for determining whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. A setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the winning probability, and a storage means (ROM 202) storing data used for progress control by the control means are provided.
Then, in the storage means, a first data table (for example, a random number determination table for judging a big hit in FIG. 27) containing a plurality of set value related information selected by referring to the set value, and a lower layer than the first data table. A second data table (for example, a special symbol creation address table in FIG. 34) that is stored in a storage area on the side and does not contain set value related information is stored, and the first data table is used for progress control. A used data storage area storing data (for example, addresses "4093" to "4111") and an unused data storage area storing unused data not used for progress control (for example, addresses "4113" to "4118"). ”) and

If only the used data storage area is reserved in the first data table that contains setting value related information, when you try to increase the number of setting values (number of steps) to be used, the setting value for the increase If such set value related information is added to the first data table, the data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer must be shifted to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table are forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
As described above, if you try to increase the number of setting values to be used by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table that contains setting value related information, increase It is possible to store set value related information related to the minute set value in the unused data storage area.
Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the data after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of setting values to be used.

Further, in the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, the usage data storage area stores usage data of a capacity corresponding to the number of setting values that can be set by the setting means, and the non-use data storage area stores the setting means. A capacity of unused data corresponding to the number of setting values that cannot be set is stored.

As a result, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure a capacity for storing the setting value related information related to the setting value corresponding to the increase when the number of stages of the setting value is increased. can.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, 0 is stored as unused data.

As a result, even if the first data table is referenced by the unused set value Vd, it is possible to prevent the set value related information corresponding to the unused set value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and to enhance the fairness of the game.

In addition, the pachinko game machine (1) of the embodiment includes control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of game motions, and control means (main control unit 20) for determining whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. A setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the winning probability, and a storage means (ROM 202) storing data used for progress control by the control means are provided.
The storage means stores a first data table (for example, the setting value offset conversion table in FIG. 16) including a plurality of setting value related information selected by referring to the setting values, and a second data table not including the setting value related information. Two data tables (for example, a special symbol creation address table in FIG. 34) are stored, and the storage means stores the first data table in a storage area on the lower layer side than the second data table, and the first data The second data table is not stored in the storage area below the table (see FIG. 35).

As a result, in order to increase the number of setting values to be used, it is sufficient to rewrite the contents of the first data table located at the lowest layer of the data area in the storage means, and the data on the layer side lower than the first data table can be rewritten. It is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite parts.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of setting values to be used.

In addition, the pachinko game machine (1) of the embodiment includes main control means (main control section 20) for controlling the progress of the game action, and effect control means (effect control section 24) for controlling the progress of the effect action. The main control means includes a setting means (setting change processing: S115) capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the winning probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. , a transmission means capable of transmitting predetermined information to the effect control means (for example, transmission processing of S705 or S809), and the setting means can set any one setting value from N types, The transmitting means can transmit set value information regarding the set value set by the setting means to the effect control means.
Then, the effect control means has an analysis means (setting-related command processing: S2130e) capable of analyzing the setting value information received from the main control means, and the analysis means has M types of setting value information, which are more than N types. It is configured to be analyzable.

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of set values to be used, the effect control means can analyze the set value information up to the M stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control means up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of setting values to be used while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, even if the set value set by the setting means and the set value analysis information based on the set value information analyzed by the analysis means correspond, It is configured to be able to execute the predetermined process even if it does not.

Thus, in making it possible to change the number of stages of the set value, the performance control means can execute processing up to the M stage, and the program rewriting of the performance control means is unnecessary up to the M stage. It becomes possible.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

In addition, the pachinko game machine (1) of the embodiment includes main control means (main control section 20) for controlling the progress of the game action, and effect control means (effect control section 24) for controlling the progress of the effect action. The main control means includes a setting means (setting change processing: S115) capable of setting a set value representing a stage of the winning probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. , a transmission means capable of transmitting predetermined information to the effect control means (for example, transmission processing of S705 or S809), and the setting means can set any one setting value from N types, The transmission means is configured to be able to transmit set value information regarding the set value set by the setting means to the effect control means.
Then, the effect control means has an analysis means (setting-related command processing: S2130e) capable of analyzing the setting value information received from the main control means, and the analysis means has M types of setting value information, which are more than N types. It is configured to be analyzable.
In addition, the main control means can execute the first process related to the progress of the game operation based on the N types of set values, and the effect control means can perform the effect operation based on the M types of set value information. It enables the execution of the second processing related to progress.

As a result, in making it possible to change the number of steps of the set value, the effect control means can execute the second processing relating to the progress of the effect operation up to M steps. That is, it becomes possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control means up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of stages of the set value while reducing the burden of rewriting the program.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and controls to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a variation pattern that determines a variation pattern related to the variation of symbols. Determining means (fluctuation pattern lottery processing in FIG. 28) controls the progress of game operations, and sets, based on operations, a set value representing a stage of winning probability for winning a game state advantageous to the player. Possible setting means (main control unit 20), production means (production control unit 24 and optical display device 45a, sound generator 46a, liquid crystal display device 36, etc.).
The advance notice effect includes a step notice effect having stages, the effect means can determine the step of the step notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the content of the notice of the step notice effect is based on the set value. It is determinable.

As for the setting suggestion using the staged announcement performance, if the stage of the staged announcement performance is determined based on the set value, the staged announcement performance will be difficult to develop, and it will be difficult to enhance the performance effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the step notice effect can be determined according to the variation information, and the details of the step notice effect can be determined based on the set value.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the development of the staged advance notice performance from becoming difficult when realizing the setting suggestion performance using the stepped advance notice performance, and to enhance the performance effect.

<8. Other Modifications>

In the description so far, the pachinko game machine using game balls as the game medium has been exemplified, but the game machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, it may be a game machine using a game medium having a shape other than a spherical shape, or a reel-type game machine.

Also, the information displayed on the setting history screen Gs is not limited to the information illustrated in FIG. For example, a set value may indicate how long the game has been played. Specifically, the date and time from when a certain set value is set until the next change may be displayed. Also, the date and time from when the power is turned on to when the game is played with a certain set value until the power is turned off may be displayed. Further, when the setting value is determined to be an abnormal value, the date and time from when the setting value is determined to be abnormal to when the normal setting value is set may be displayed. In addition, originally, the setting value does not change during the game, and the setting value does not change from normal to abnormal, but if the setting value changes even during the game due to noise or silly actions, , the date and time may be stored and displayed as a history display. In addition, the number of times the RAM clear processing and the backup restoration processing have been performed and the date and time information may be similarly displayed. Also, the timing for displaying the history display may be, for example, while the setting change process is being performed, other than while the setting confirmation process is being performed. Furthermore, the history may be displayed when a predetermined operation input is performed even during a game.

In the above, an example was given in which the history information is saved in the internal work (work area of the RAM 243) according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display, and the history information saved in the internal work is immediately stored in the memory 244. However, the timing for storing the history information of the internal work in the memory 244 is to refer to the elapsed time stored in the internal work and store (copy) it in the memory 244 when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed. is also possible.

In addition, regarding the setting history confirmation screen Gs, even after the display is finished in response to the end instruction operation, if the predetermined display condition such as setting confirmation (or setting change) is satisfied, display instruction is given again. It can be displayed any number of times according to the operation. Alternatively, if the setting history confirmation screen Gs has already been displayed a predetermined number of times, such as once, under conditions that satisfy a predetermined display condition, the setting history confirmation screen Gs will not be displayed even if the display instruction operation is performed again. can also be disabled.
Also, it is desirable to hide the performance display monitor that displays the base value while the history information is being displayed. Further, the volume/light amount adjustment may be configured to be effective even while the history information is being displayed. At this time, although the adjustment is effective, it is desirable not to display the content of the adjustment on the display means.
Also, the contents and status of the performance display monitor may be displayed on the liquid crystal, in which case it is desirable to display them at a position that does not overlap with the history information. In addition, the volume/light amount may be configured to be non-adjustable. In this case, there is no fear that the history information and the display overlap, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen configuration is increased.

In addition, it is desirable not to execute the initializing operation of at least the movable body on the board side while the history information is being displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board-side movable body from moving to the front side of the display means and hindering the visibility of the display screen. Similarly, the movable body on the frame side may also be set so as not to perform the initializing operation. However, the movable body on the frame side may be initialized if there is no possibility of obstructing the display screen. In this case, for example, the initializing operation of the vibrating means mounted on the operating means, or the initializing operation of the air ejecting means for ejecting air may be performed. As a result, the initializing operation of the movable body on the frame side can be finished first, so that after the display of the history information, that is, after the setting confirmation process (or setting change process) is finished, the movable body on the board side can be moved. It is efficient because it only needs to initialize the body. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization operation may be performed for all movable bodies after the history information is displayed.

In addition, when the setting value change operation is performed in a state where the harness connecting the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 is disconnected, the main control unit 20 performs processing based on the changed setting value. On the other hand, since the performance control unit 24 cannot know the information, it cannot be stored and displayed as history information. Therefore, by changing the setting value with the harness disconnected, turning off the power once, and then turning on the power again with the harness reconnected, the setting value can be changed without leaving traces of the changed setting value. I can do it. In order to prevent this, when the power is turned on, information on the setting value is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 transmits the information on the stored setting value and the information transmitted from the main control unit 20. If a contradiction is found by comparing the set value information, the error may be notified using a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal, or the like.
Also, in this case, the effect control unit 24 side may be set to a game stop state, and even if a command related to the game is transmitted from the main control unit 20, it is configured not to perform processing based on it. You may In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives various commands transmitted when executing the setting change process or the RAM clear process, the main control unit 20 side determines that the setting change process has been performed normally again. Judgment is made, and the newly determined set value is stored, and error notification is interrupted/cancelled (contradiction occurrence ⇒ error notification ⇒ power off ⇒ setting change in progress (no error notification) ⇒ setting change completed (no error notification)) You may make it In addition, when the power is turned on for the first time, there is no information about the setting value on the effect control unit 24 side. , it is desirable to configure so that error notification is not performed.

1, 1A pachinko game machine 13 effect button 16 cross key 20 main control board (main control unit)
201 CPUs
202 ROMs
203 RAM
24 production control board (production control unit)
241 CPUs
242 ROMs
243 RAM
36 liquid crystal display device 38a, 38b special pattern display device 40 liquid crystal control unit 45 decorative lamp 45a optical display device 46 speaker 46a sound generator 61 front door open sensor 94 setting key switch 97 setting/performance indicator 98 RAM clear switch Gs setting history confirmation screen

Claims (1)

random number lottery means capable of executing a random number lottery in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition;
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying setting information related to the probability of winning in the random number lottery,
setting enabling means for starting a settable period, which is a period in which the setting information can be set, based on the establishment of a first condition;
confirmation enabling means for starting a setting confirmation period, which is a period during which the setting information can be confirmed, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition ;
a stopping means for setting a non-playable state when the setting information is abnormal;
display setting processing means for executing a setting process for performing an operation confirmation display of the display means after the settable period or the setting confirmation period has ended;
outputting a security signal common to the settable period and the setting confirmation period;
display of the setting information during the settable period and display of the setting information during the setting confirmation period are performed intermittently at predetermined intervals using a common display control process;
The display means is configured to display specific information different from the setting information during the game disabled state.
game machine.

Images